WO2023098499A1 - 波束配置方法、装置和系统 - Google Patents

波束配置方法、装置和系统 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023098499A1
WO2023098499A1 PCT/CN2022/133144 CN2022133144W WO2023098499A1 WO 2023098499 A1 WO2023098499 A1 WO 2023098499A1 CN 2022133144 W CN2022133144 W CN 2022133144W WO 2023098499 A1 WO2023098499 A1 WO 2023098499A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
node
information
candidate
link
coordinating
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2022/133144
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
栗忠峰
张长
冯奇
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to EP22900304.1A priority Critical patent/EP4422086A4/en
Publication of WO2023098499A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023098499A1/zh
Priority to US18/668,170 priority patent/US20240305351A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0617—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal for beam forming
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/022—Site diversity; Macro-diversity
    • H04B7/024—Co-operative use of antennas of several sites, e.g. in co-ordinated multipoint or co-operative multiple-input multiple-output [MIMO] systems
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0695—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
    • H04B7/06952—Selecting one or more beams from a plurality of beams, e.g. beam training, management or sweeping
    • H04B7/0696—Determining beam pairs
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621—Feedback content
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0684—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission using different training sequences per antenna
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0695—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
    • H04B7/06952—Selecting one or more beams from a plurality of beams, e.g. beam training, management or sweeping
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00—Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/24—Cell structures
    • H04W16/28—Cell structures using beam steering
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/046—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being in the space domain, e.g. beams

Definitions

  • the embodiment of the present application relates to the communication field. More specifically, it relates to a beam configuration method, device and system.
  • Each of the two devices needs to perform periodic beam scanning for other devices to discover or establish connections, wherein in each scanning period, each beam within the full beam range needs to be used to send or receive synchronization signals respectively.
  • the device needs to scan within the full beam range, resulting in long delay and high energy consumption, which cannot meet the fast access requirements.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a beam configuration method, device, and system, which can reduce time delay and energy consumption during beam scanning.
  • a beam configuration method is provided, which is applied in a communication system, where the communication system includes a first node, a second node, and a third node, and the coordinating nodes are the first node, the second node, and For any node in the third node, the method includes: the coordinating node acquiring first information, the first information including the information of the candidate beam of the first node and the candidate beam of the second node information; the coordinating node determines the beam information of the first node and the beam information of the second node according to the first information, wherein the beam information of the first node is used to indicate the first The sending beam of the node, the beam information of the second node is used to indicate the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the coordinating node assists in determining the communication beam information of the first node and the second node by obtaining the information of the candidate beams of the first node and the second node, and the first node and the second node configure Beam scanning and alignment based on beam information to reduce delay and energy consumption.
  • the acquiring the first information by the coordinating node includes: acquiring the first information by the coordinating node in at least one of the following ways: the coordinating node receives the first information The information of the candidate beams of the first node reported by a node; or, the coordinating node receives the information of the candidate beams of the second node reported by the second node.
  • the coordinating node receives the information of the candidate beam reported by the first node and the second node; if the coordinating node is the first node, the cooperating node receives the information of the candidate beam of the second node; In the second node, the coordinating node receives the information of the candidate beam of the first node.
  • the first node and/or the second node report the information of their respective candidate beams, so that the coordinating node can receive the information and determine the beam information of the two nodes.
  • the reporting can be periodic active reporting, thereby reducing the overhead and delay of the coordinating nodes sending information instructions to report, and improving the communication efficiency of the two nodes.
  • the method further includes: the coordinating node performing at least one of the following operations: the coordinating node sends First request information, where the first request information is used to instruct the first node to report information about candidate beams of the first node; or, the coordinating node sends second request information to the second node, so The second request information is used to instruct the second node to report the information of the candidate beams of the second node.
  • the coordinating node can obtain relevant information in time by sending request information to the first node and/or the second node to request information of candidate beams of the first node and/or the second node.
  • the information about the candidate beams includes information related to at least one of an angular range and a geographical range.
  • Candidate beam information includes information related to at least one of the angle range and geographic location range, which means that the first node and/or the second node can report all beam information, or only part of the beam information.
  • the above-mentioned part of the beam information can be It is determined by the first node and/or the second node that only the part of the beam information is to be reported, or the coordinating node may only request the first node and/or the second node to report part of the beam information, thereby saving reporting overhead and enabling
  • the coordinating node determines the beam information of the first node and the second node in a smaller range, reducing the coordination overhead of the coordinating node.
  • the information about the candidate beam of the first node includes an index of the candidate beam of the first node, an angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node, and the at least one of the number of candidate beams of the first node;
  • the information of the candidate beams of the second node includes the index of the candidate beam of the second node, and the corresponding angle of the index of the candidate beam of the second node and at least one of the number of candidate beams of the second node.
  • the information of the candidate beams obtained by the coordinating node is the index of the candidate beam and/or the corresponding angle of the index of the candidate beam, or the information of the candidate beam is the number of the candidate beams, and the coordinating node can flexibly base on the information of different candidate beams , configure corresponding beam information for the first node and the second node.
  • the number of the candidate beams is determined according to the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node.
  • the first node or the second node may determine the direction of the third link according to the location information of the first node and the second node, so as to select several beams corresponding to the direction as candidate beams, that is, determine the number of candidate beams. Determining the number of candidate beams according to the position information can avoid selecting beams with an excessive range, and reduce beam scanning overhead.
  • the coordinating node performs at least one of the following operations: sending the location information of the second node to the first node; or sending the first node The location information of is sent to the second node.
  • the coordinating node sends the location information of a node to the opposite side of the link or the target node, so that the two nodes can determine their own candidate beams according to their own location information and the location information of the opposite node, which is convenient for the coordinating node to further configure the beam sequence.
  • the beam information of the first node includes a transmit beam sequence of the first node; the beam information of the second node includes a receive beam sequence of the second node sequence.
  • the cooperating node can determine the transmitting beam sequence of the first node and the receiving beam sequence of the second node according to the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam; the cooperating node can determine the transmitting beam sequence of the first node according to the number of candidate beams beam sequence and the receive beam sequence of the second node. Therefore, the first node and the second node can perform beam scanning and alignment according to the corresponding beam sequence, quickly match the optimal beam, and reduce beam scanning overhead and delay.
  • the coordinating node determines beam information of the first node and beam information of the second node according to the first information, including: the coordinating node According to at least one of the index of the candidate beam of the first node and the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node, determine the index of the transmission beam of the first node and the transmission beam of the first node at least one of the angles corresponding to the index of the index; the coordinating node determines the second node according to at least one of the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the second node and the index of the candidate beam of the second node At least one of the angles corresponding to the index of the receiving beam of the second node and the index of the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the coordinating node can determine the index of the beam of the first node and the second node and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the beam of the first node and the second node according to the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam. Therefore, the first node and the second node can use corresponding beams to perform beam scanning, reduce the range of beam scanning, and reduce time delay and overhead.
  • the first information further includes at least one of first sub-information and second sub-information
  • the first sub-information includes direction, the distance of the first link, the direction of the second link and the distance of the second link
  • the second sub-information includes the position information of the first node and the position information of the second node location information
  • the first link is a link between the first node and the third node
  • the second link is a link between the second node and the third node link
  • the coordinating node determines the beam information of the first node and the beam information of the second node according to the first information, including: the coordinating node determines the beam information of the first node and the beam information of the second node according to the first sub-information and at least one item of the second sub-information and the information of the candidate beams of the first node, determine the beam information of the first node; At least one item of the information and the information of the candidate beams of the second node are used to
  • the coordinating node determines the direction of the third link according to at least one of the first subinformation and the second subinformation; and determines the direction of the third link according to the direction of the third link.
  • the coordinating node can determine the direction of the third link according to the distance and direction of the first link and the distance and direction of the second link according to the geometric relationship, so as to determine the direction of the first node and the Beam information of the second node.
  • the coordinating node can also determine the direction of the third link according to the position information of the first node and the position information of the second node, and determine the beam information of the first node and the second node according to the direction of the third link and information of candidate beams .
  • the cooperative node can select the beam close to the direction of the third link from the information of the candidate beams as the communication beam of the first node and the second node, reduce the range of beam scanning when the first node and the second node are connected, and reduce the delay and overhead.
  • the coordinating node before the determining the beam information of the first node and the beam information of the second node, further includes: the coordinating node according to the first sub- information and at least one of the second sub-information, to determine the distance between the first node and the second node; when the distance between the first node and the second node is less than a preset threshold , the coordinating node determines the beam information of the first node and the beam information of the second node.
  • the channel quality of the first node and the second node will not meet the requirements due to the long distance, reducing unnecessary connections and configurations, and reducing the cooperative node Coordination overhead and overhead reported by the first node and the second node
  • the method further includes: the coordinating node performing at least one of the following operations: sending the sending resource information of the first node to the first node; or sending the resource information of the first node to the The second node sends the receiving resource information of the second node; wherein, the sending resource information of the first node is used to indicate the resource of the sending beam of the first node, and the receiving resource information of the second node is used for Indicating resources of the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the coordinating node configures resources for sending or receiving beams for the first node and the second node, so as to cope with duplex matching and avoid resource conflicts.
  • the coordinating node determines the resource information of the first node and the second node according to the candidate resource information of the two nodes.
  • the method further includes: the coordinating node is the second node or the third node, and the coordinating node sends the first node to the first node The transmit power information of the first node, where the transmit power information of the first node is used to indicate the transmit power of the first node.
  • the coordinating node determines the transmit power of the first node according to acquired third information, where the third information includes distance information between the first node and the second node, where the first node is At least one of the antenna gain information of the first link, the antenna gain information of the second node on the second link, and the path loss information of the third link predicted by the coordination node, wherein the The third link is a link used for communication between the first node and the second node; the coordinating node determines the sending power of the first node according to the third information.
  • the link between the third node and the first node is a first link
  • the link between the third node and the second node is a second link.
  • the coordinating node determines the transmission power of the first node when the first node communicates with the second node to ensure an appropriate transmission power and avoid affecting other links when the power is high. When the power is low, the channel quality is not high and the transmission power needs to be increased.
  • the method further includes: the coordinating node is the first node or the third node, and the coordinating node sends the feedback of the second node to the second node Resource information, the feedback resource information of the second node is used to indicate the feedback resource of the second node, where the feedback resource is used to feed back the information between the first node and the second node to the coordination node At least one of beam pairing status, data transmission status between the first node and the second node, and channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • the coordinating node configures the feedback resources of the second node, so that the second node can timely feed back the beam pairing status between the first node and the second node, the data transmission status between the first node and the second node, and the coordinating node.
  • the channel quality between a node and a second node can trigger reconfiguration of beams or select other beams for communication in time when beam pairing fails, data transmission fails, or channel quality is poor.
  • the first node, the second node, and the third node all use a global coordinate system GCS.
  • GCS GCS
  • the first node and/or the second node use a local coordinate system LCS, and the coordination node uses a global coordinate system GCS;
  • the first reference information, determining the beam information of the first node and/or the beam information of the second node includes: converting, by the coordinating node, information of candidate beams corresponding to the LCS in the first reference information into corresponding
  • the information of the candidate beams of the GCS is obtained by converting the first reference information; the coordinating node determines the information of the candidate beams of the GCS corresponding to the first node and the second node according to the converted first reference information.
  • the coordinating node converts the information of the candidate beams corresponding to the GCS of the first node and the second node into beam information corresponding to the LCS, and obtains the beam information of the first node and/or the information of the second node beam information.
  • the coordinating node can convert the information of the candidate beams related to the coordinating system into the information of the coordinating node’s coordinating system, so that the scope of application of the technical solution of this application can be wider, and the scope of the application can be increased.
  • the coordinating node is the third node
  • the coordinating node obtaining the first information includes: the coordinating node directly obtaining the Information about the candidate beams of the first node; the coordinating node obtains the information about the candidate beams of the second node directly through the second node; or, the coordinating node is the first node or the second node
  • the coordinating node acquiring the first information includes: the coordinating node indirectly acquiring the information of the candidate beam of the first node or the other of the second node through the third node.
  • the coordinating node can directly obtain the information of its candidate beam through the link with the first node or the second node; when the coordinating node is the first node When it is one of the second nodes, the coordinating node can obtain the candidate beam information of the node on the opposite side of the third link through the third node, so that the change of the coordinating node will not affect the beam information configuration, ensuring timely and effective information transmission.
  • the method further includes: the coordination node performing at least one of the following operations: the coordination node sends first indication information to the first node, and the first indication information including beam information of the first node; or, the coordinating node sends second indication information to the second node, where the second indication information includes beam information of the second node.
  • the coordinating node After the coordinating node configures beam information for the first node and/or the second node, it can send the configured beam information to the first node and/or the second node, so that the first node and/or the second node Information is communicated, avoiding full-range beam scanning, and reducing the overhead of beam scanning.
  • the coordination node is the third node, and the third node is a relay node or a source node.
  • the source node or the relay node acts as a cooperative node to assist the link establishment process, which can reduce the delay and overhead of beam scanning.
  • the coordination node is the first node, and the coordination node is a source node or a sink node.
  • the coordination node is determined through negotiation among the first node, the second node, and the third node, or is a preconfigured node.
  • Cooperating nodes can be negotiated or pre-configured nodes, so that coordinating nodes may have strong access to location information, direction information, and distance information, and may have strong processing or computing capabilities, or are relatively close to other nodes. Close, so as to facilitate the transfer of signaling during the configuration process.
  • a beam configuration method is provided, which is applied in a communication system, where the communication system includes a first node, a second node, and a third node, and the coordinating node is the third node or the second node,
  • the method includes: the first node sends information of a candidate beam of the first node to the coordinating node; the first node receives beam information of the first node from the coordinating node, and the first The beam information of the node is used to indicate the sending beam or the receiving beam of the first node.
  • the first node sends the information of candidate beams to the coordinating node, so that the coordinating node can determine the beam used by the first node to communicate with the second node, reducing overhead and delay.
  • the first node may be a sending node or a receiving node.
  • the beam information of the first node is used to indicate the sending beam of the first node.
  • the beam information of the first node is used to indicate the receiving beam of the first node.
  • the method further includes: the first node receiving the coordination First request information sent by a node, where the first request information is used to instruct the first node to report the information of the candidate beams of the first node.
  • the information about the candidate beams of the first node includes information related to at least one of an angle range and a geographical range.
  • the information about the candidate beam of the first node includes an index of the candidate beam of the first node, an angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node, and the at least one of the number of candidate beams of the first node.
  • the number of candidate beams of the first node is determined by the first node according to the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node of.
  • the location information of the second node is received by the first node from the coordination node.
  • the beam information of the first node includes at least one of an index of the beam of the first node and an angle corresponding to the index of the beam of the first node;
  • the beam information of the first node includes a beam sequence of the first node.
  • the beam information of the first node is determined according to at least one of the first sub-information and the second sub-information and information of candidate beams of the first node wherein, the first sub-information includes the direction of the first link, the distance of the first link, the direction of the second link and the distance of the second link, and the first The second sub-information includes the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node; the first link is a link between the first node and the third node, and the second A link is a link between said second node and said third node.
  • the method further includes: the first node sends candidate resource information of the first node to the coordination node, and the candidate resource information of the first node is used for the cooperation
  • the node determines at least one of the resources of the first node's sending beam or receiving beam and the feedback resource of the first node, wherein the feedback resource is used to feed back the first node and the first node to the coordination node. At least one of beam pairing status between the second nodes, data transmission status between the first node and the second node, and channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • the method further includes: the first node receives resource information of the first node from the coordination node, and the resource information of the first node includes the resource information of the first node At least one of the resource of the transmitting beam or the receiving beam and the feedback resource of the first node, wherein the feedback resource is used to feed back the beam between the first node and the second node to the cooperative node At least one of a pairing state, a data transmission state between the first node and the second node, and a channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • the method further includes: the first node sends antenna gain information of the first node to the coordinated node, and the antenna gain information is used by the coordinated node to determine The transmission power of the first node on the third link; wherein the third link is a link used for communication between the first node and the second node.
  • the method further includes: the first node is a sending node between the first node and the second node, and the first node receives information from the coordination The sending power information of the first node of the node, where the sending power information is used to indicate the sending power of the first node.
  • the first node, the second node, and the third node all use a global coordinate system GCS.
  • the first node uses a global coordinate system GCS
  • the coordinating node uses a local coordinate system LCS
  • the coordinating node is the third node, and the first node sends information about the candidate beams of the first node to the coordinating node, including: the The first node sends the information of the candidate beam of the first node to the coordination node; or, the coordination node is the second node, and the first node sends the information of the first node to the coordination node
  • the information of the candidate beams of the first node includes: the first node sends the information of the candidate beams of the first node to the coordination node through the third node.
  • the first node is any one of a relay node, a sink node, and a source node.
  • the distance between the first node and the second node is smaller than a preset threshold.
  • a beam configuration method is provided, which is applied in a communication system, where the communication system includes a first node, a second node, and a third node, and the coordinating node is the third node or the second node,
  • the method includes: the first node sends information of a candidate beam of the first node to the coordinating node; the first node receives beam information of the first node from the coordinating node, and the first The beam information of the node is used to indicate the sending beam of the first node.
  • the first node as the sending node when the first node communicates with the second node, sends the information of its candidate beam to the coordinating node, so that the coordinating node can determine the information of the first node according to the information of the candidate beam Send beam information to reduce overhead and delay.
  • the method further includes: the first node receiving the coordinating node First request information sent by a node, where the first request information is used to instruct the first node to report the information of the candidate beams of the first node.
  • the information about the candidate beams of the first node includes information related to at least one of an angle range and a geographical range.
  • the information about the candidate beam of the first node includes an index of the candidate beam of the first node, an angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node, and the at least one of the number of candidate beams of the first node.
  • the beam information of the first node includes at least one of an index of the beam of the first node and an angle corresponding to the index of the beam of the first node;
  • the beam information of the first node includes a beam sequence of the first node.
  • the number of candidate beams of the first node is determined by the first node according to the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node of.
  • the location information of the second node is received by the first node from the coordination node.
  • the beam information of the first node is determined according to at least one of the first sub-information and the second sub-information and information of candidate beams of the first node wherein, the first sub-information includes the direction of the first link, the distance of the first link, the direction of the second link and the distance of the second link, and the first The second sub-information includes location information of the first node and location information of the second node.
  • the method further includes: the first node receives resource information of a first node from the coordination node, and the resource information of the first node is used to indicate that the first node The resources of a node's transmit beam.
  • the method further includes: the first node sends antenna gain information of the first node on the first link to the coordinated node, and the antenna gain information Used for the coordinating node to determine the sending power of the first node on a third link; wherein the third link is a link used for communication between the first node and the second node.
  • the first node is a sending node between the first node and the second node, and the first node receives the The transmission power information of the first node of the node, where the transmission power information of the first node is used to indicate the transmission power of the first node.
  • the first node, the second node, and the third node all use a global coordinate system GCS.
  • the first node uses a global coordinate system GCS
  • the coordinating node uses a local coordinate system LCS
  • the coordinating node is the third node, and the first node sends information about the candidate beams of the first node to the coordinating node, including: the The first node sends the information of the candidate beam of the first node to the coordination node; or, the coordination node is the second node, and the first node sends the information of the first node to the coordination node
  • the information of the candidate beams of the first node includes: the first node sends the information of the candidate beams of the first node to the coordination node through the third node.
  • the first node is any one of a relay node, a sink node, and a source node.
  • the distance of the third link is smaller than a preset threshold.
  • a beam configuration method is provided, which is applied in a communication system, where the communication system includes a first node, a second node, and a third node, and the coordinating node is the third node or the first node,
  • the method includes: the second node sends the information of the candidate beam of the first node to the coordinating node; the second node receives the beam information of the second node from the coordinating node, and the second node
  • the beam information of the node is used to indicate the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the second node as the receiving node when the first node communicates with the second node, sends the information of its candidate beam to the coordinating node, so that the coordinating node can determine the second node according to the information of the candidate beam received beam information, reducing overhead and delay.
  • the method further includes: the second node receiving the coordinating The second request information sent by the node, where the second request information is used to instruct the second node to report the information of the candidate beam of the second node.
  • the information about the candidate beams of the second node includes information related to at least one of an angular range and a geographical range.
  • the information about the candidate beam of the second node includes an index of the candidate beam of the second node, an angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the second node, and the at least one of the number of candidate beams of the second node.
  • the number of candidate beams of the second node is determined by the second node according to the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node of.
  • the location information of the first node is received by the second node from the coordination node.
  • the beam information of the second node includes at least one of an index of the beam of the second node and an angle corresponding to the index of the beam of the second node;
  • the beam information of the second node includes a beam sequence of the second node.
  • the beam information of the second node is determined according to at least one of the first sub-information and the second sub-information and the information of the candidate beam of the first node wherein, the first sub-information includes the direction of the first link, the distance of the first link, the direction of the second link and the distance of the second link, and the first The second sub-information includes location information of the first node and location information of the second node.
  • the method further includes: the second node receiving resource information of a second node from the coordination node, where the resource information of the second node is used to indicate that the first At least one of the receiving beam resources of the two nodes and the feedback resource of the second node, wherein the feedback resource is used to feed back the beam pairing between the first node and the second node to the cooperative node At least one of the state, the data transmission state between the first node and the second node, and the channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • the method further includes: the second node sends antenna gain information of the second node on the second link to the coordinating node, and the antenna gain information Used for the coordinating node to determine the sending power of the first node on a third link; wherein the third link is a link used for communication between the first node and the second node.
  • the first node, the second node, and the third node all use a global coordinate system GCS.
  • the first node uses a global coordinate system GCS
  • the cooperating node uses a local coordinate system LCS
  • the first node sends the coordinating node the A conversion coefficient from the LCS to the GCS, where the conversion coefficient from the LCS to the GCS is used by the coordinating node to configure beam information corresponding to the GCS for the first node.
  • the coordinating node is the third node, and the second node sends information about candidate beams of the second node to the coordinating node, including: the The second node directly sends the information of the candidate beam of the second node to the coordination node; or, the coordination node is the first node, and the second node sends the second node to the coordination node
  • the information of the candidate beam of the node includes: the second node indirectly sends the information of the candidate beam of the second node to the coordination node through the third node.
  • the second node is any one of a relay node, a sink node, and a source node.
  • the distance of the third link is smaller than a preset threshold.
  • a beam configuration method comprising: a first node acquires location information of a second node; information and the information of the candidate beam of the first node, determine the beam information of the first node, and the beam information of the first node is used to indicate the sending or receiving beam of the first node.
  • the first node determines the beam information of the first node itself according to the position information of the first node and the obtained position information of the second node, thereby avoiding , to perform full-range beam scanning, which can reduce overhead and delay.
  • the first node determines, according to the location information of the first node, the location information of the second node, and the candidate beam information of the first node
  • the beam information of the first node includes: the first node determines the direction of the third link according to the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node; the first node Determine the information of the candidate beam of the first node according to the information of the candidate beam of the first node and the direction of the third link, where the third link is the connection between the first node and the third link.
  • the first node can determine the direction of the third link according to the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node, and then select a beam close to the direction in the beam of the first node as a candidate according to the direction of the third link Beam, reducing the range of beam scanning, reducing overhead and delay.
  • the information about the candidate beams of the first node includes information related to at least one of an angle range and a geographical range.
  • the fact that the candidate beam information includes information related to at least one of the angle range and geographic location range means that the first node determines all or part of the beam information as the candidate beam information according to the positions of the second node and the first node.
  • the first node can further determine its beam information in the part of the beam information, reduce the beam scanning range, and reduce overhead and delay.
  • the first node obtaining the location information of the second node includes: the first node obtaining the location information of the second node through a third node information, wherein the link between the third node and the first node is a first link, and the link between the third node and the second node is a second link.
  • the first node Since there is no direct link between the first node and the second node, the first node needs to pass through the third node to obtain the location information of the second node, and the third node assists in the information transmission between the first node and the second node, which is convenient for the second node
  • a node determines beam information for communication between itself and a second node, thereby reducing scanning overhead and time delay.
  • the method further includes: the first node forwards the location information of the first node to the second node through the third node, and the location information of the first node The location information is used by the second node to determine beam information of the second node.
  • the first node also forwards the location information of the first node to the second node through the third node, so that the second node can also determine its own beam information according to the location information of the first node, reducing the time when the second node communicates with the first node
  • the range of beam scanning reduces delay and overhead.
  • the method further includes: the first The node receives the first request information sent by the third node, where the first request information is used to instruct the first node to report the coordinates corresponding to the first geographical range.
  • the first node can send the coordinates corresponding to the first geographical range to the second node through the third node, so that when the first node and the second node need to communicate, the first node should report the information corresponding to the first geographical range in time. coordinates, the second node determines its own beam information in time based on this, reducing the beam scanning range, reducing delay and overhead.
  • the location information of the second node includes location coordinates of the second node and/or a geographic location range of the second node.
  • the information angle range of the candidate beam that the first node can determine is relatively small, and the first node can perform beam scanning within a smaller range;
  • the overhead required by the second node to report the geographic location range is small, thereby reducing the overhead of the second node.
  • the first node performs beam scanning according to the geographic location range of the second node, The scanning overhead and delay of the first node are reduced.
  • the method further includes: the first node receives resource information of the first node from the third node, and the resource information of the first node is used to indicate the The resource of the sending or receiving beam of the first node and/or the feedback resource of the first node, wherein the feedback resource is used to feed back the information of the beam between the first node and the second node to the third node At least one of beam pairing status, data transmission status between the first node and the second node, or channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • the third node may configure resources corresponding to communication beams for the first node and the second node by acquiring the candidate resources of the first node in combination with the candidate resources of the second node, so as to cope with duplex matching and reduce resource conflicts.
  • the third node can also configure feedback resources for the receiving node among the first node and the second node, and feed back the beam pairing status, data transmission status and channel quality, so as to trigger timely re-determination when data transmission fails or the channel quality is too poor Beam information reduces the delay of information transmission and increases the reliability of data transmission.
  • the method further includes: the first node is a sending node between the first node and the second node, and the first node sends a message to the third node sending antenna gain information of the first node on the first link, where the antenna gain information is used by the third node to determine the sending power of the first node.
  • the method further includes: the first node is a sending node between the first node and the second node, and the first node receives the third node Sending the sending power information of the first node, where the sending power information is used to indicate the sending power of the first node.
  • the third node determines the transmission power of the first node when the first node communicates with the second node to ensure an appropriate transmission power and avoid affecting other links when the power is high.
  • the power is low, the channel quality is not high and the transmission power needs to be increased.
  • a device which is applied in a communication system, and the communication system includes a first node, a second node, and a third node, and the device is a coordinating node, and the coordinating node is the first node, the second node, and any one of the third node
  • the apparatus includes: a transceiver unit configured to acquire first information, the first information including information about candidate beams of the first node and the information of the candidate beams of the second node; a processing unit configured to determine the beam information of the first node and the beam information of the second node according to the first information, wherein the first node The beam information of the first node is used to indicate the sending beam of the first node, and the beam information of the second node is used to indicate the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the transceiver unit of the device obtains the information of the candidate beam of the first node and the information of the candidate beam of the second node, and the processing unit determines the beam information of the first node and the information of the second node according to the information.
  • beam information reducing the beam scanning overhead and time delay when the first node and the second node communicate.
  • the transceiving unit is specifically configured to acquire the first information in at least one of the following ways: receiving a candidate beam of the first node reported by the first node or, receiving information about candidate beams of the second node reported by the second node.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to perform at least one of the following operations: send first request information to the first node, where the first request information is used to indicate The first node reports the information of the candidate beams of the first node; or, sends second request information to the second node, and the second request information is used to instruct the second node to report the second Information about the candidate beams of the node.
  • the information about the candidate beams includes information related to at least one of an angular range and a geographical range.
  • the information about the candidate beam of the first node includes an index of the candidate beam of the first node, an angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node, and the at least one of the number of candidate beams of the first node;
  • the information of the candidate beams of the second node includes the index of the candidate beam of the second node, and the corresponding angle of the index of the candidate beam of the second node and at least one of the number of candidate beams of the second node.
  • the number of the candidate beams is determined according to the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node.
  • the beam information of the first node includes at least one of an index of the transmit beam of the first node and an angle corresponding to the index of the transmit beam of the first node item; the beam information of the second node includes at least one of the index of the receiving beam of the second node and the angle corresponding to the index of the receiving beam of the second node; or, the beam information of the first node includes the sending beam sequence of the first node; the beam information of the second node includes the receiving beam sequence of the second node.
  • the first information further includes at least one of first subinformation and second subinformation
  • the first subinformation includes direction, the distance of the first link, the direction of the second link and the distance of the second link
  • the second sub-information includes the position information of the first node and the position information of the second node location information
  • the first link is a link between the third node and the first node
  • the second link is a link between the third node and the second node
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to: determine the beam of the first node according to at least one of the first sub-information and the second sub-information and the information of the candidate beam of the first node Information: determining beam information of the second node according to at least one of the first sub-information and the second sub-information and information of candidate beams of the second node.
  • the processing unit is further configured to: determine the relationship between the first node and the The distance between the second nodes; when the distance between the first node and the second node is less than a preset threshold, determine the beam information of the first node and the beam information of the second node.
  • the transceiving unit is further configured to acquire second information, where the second information includes candidate resource information of the first node and candidate resource information of the second node.
  • Resource information includes candidate resource information of the first node and candidate resource information of the second node.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine the sending resource information of the first node and the receiving resource information of the second node according to the second information, and the sending resource information of the first node is used for The resource of the transmitting beam of the first node is indicated, and the receiving resource information of the second node is used to indicate the resource of the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send the sending resource information of the first node and/or the receiving resource information of the second node, and the first node
  • the sending resource information of the first node is used to indicate the resource of the sending beam of the first node
  • the receiving resource information of the second node is used to indicate the resource of the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to obtain third information, where the third information includes distance information between the first node and the second node, the At least one of the antenna gain information of the first node on the first link, the antenna gain information of the second node on the second link, and the path loss information of the third link predicted by the coordination node One item, wherein the third link is a link used for communication between the first node and the second node; the processing unit is further configured to determine the third link according to the third information The transmit power of a node.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send transmit power information of the first node to the first node, and the transmit power information of the first node is used for Indicates the sending power of the first node.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine feedback resource information of the second node, where the feedback resource information of the second node is used to indicate that the second node feedback resource, wherein the feedback resource is used to feed back the beam pairing state between the first node and the second node, and the data transmission state between the first node and the second node to the coordination node and at least one item of channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • the coordinating node is the third node
  • the transceiver unit is specifically configured to: obtain information about candidate beams of the first node through the first node Obtain the information of the candidate beam of the second node through the second node; or, the coordinating node is one of the first node or the second node, and the transceiver unit is specifically used for: Information of candidate beams of the other of the first node or the second node is acquired by the third node.
  • the apparatus further includes a transceiver unit, configured for the transceiver unit to perform at least one of the following operations: send a first indication information, where the first indication information includes beam information of the first node; or, sending second indication information to the second node, where the second indication information includes beam information of the second node.
  • an apparatus which is applied in a communication system, where the communication system includes a first node, a second node, and a third node, and the coordinating node is the third node or the second node, and the The device is the first node, and the device includes: a transceiving unit, configured to send information about candidate beams of the first node to the coordinating node; and the transceiving unit, further configured to receive information from the coordinating node Beam information of the first node, where the beam information of the first node is used to indicate a sending beam or a receiving beam of the first node.
  • the transceiver unit of the device sends the information of its own candidate beam, and the transceiver unit receives the beam information configured for it by the coordinating node.
  • the beam information is determined according to the information of the candidate beam, so that the first node Use beam information for beam scanning, reduce the range of beam scanning when the first node and the second node communicate, and reduce overhead and delay
  • the transceiving unit is further configured to: receive first request information sent by the coordination node, where the first request information is used to instruct the first node to report Information about candidate beams of the first node.
  • the information about the candidate beams of the first node includes information related to at least one of an angular range and a geographical range.
  • the information about the candidate beam of the first node includes an index of the candidate beam of the first node, an angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node, and the at least one of the number of candidate beams of the first node.
  • the number of candidate beams of the first node is determined according to location information of the first node and location information of the second node.
  • the location information of the second node is received from the coordination node.
  • the beam information of the first node includes at least one of an index of the beam of the first node and an angle corresponding to the index of the beam of the first node;
  • the beam information of the first node includes a beam sequence of the first node.
  • the beam information of the first node is determined according to at least one of the first sub-information and the second sub-information and the information of the candidate beam of the first node ;
  • the first sub-information includes the direction of the first link, the distance of the first link, the direction of the second link and the distance of the second link, the second The sub-information includes location information of the first node and location information of the second node.
  • the transceiving unit is further configured to send candidate resource information of the first node to the coordination node, and the candidate resource information of the first node is used for the cooperation
  • the node determines at least one of the resource of the first node's sending beam or receiving beam and the feedback resource of the first node, where the feedback resource is used to feed back the information of the first node and the first node to the coordinating node. At least one of beam pairing state between the second nodes, data transmission state between the first node and the second node, and channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive resource information from the coordination node, where the resource information is used to indicate the sending beam or receiving beam of the first node At least one of resources and feedback resources of the first node.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send antenna gain information of the first node on the first link to the coordination node, where the antenna gain information Used for the coordinating node to determine the sending power of the first node on a third link; wherein the third link is a link used for communication between the first node and the second node.
  • the first node is a sending node between the first node and the second node
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive information from the cooperation The sending power information of the first node sent by the node, where the sending power information of the first node is used to indicate the sending power of the first node.
  • the coordination node is the third node
  • the transceiver unit is specifically configured to: send the first node to the coordination node through the first node Information about the candidate beam of the node; or, the coordinating node is the second node, and the transceiver unit is specifically configured to: send information about the candidate beam of the first node to the coordinating node through the third node information.
  • an apparatus including a module or unit for performing the method in the third aspect or any possible implementation manner of the third aspect.
  • the module or unit may be a hardware circuit, or software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software.
  • an apparatus including a module or unit for performing the method in the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect.
  • the module or unit may be a hardware circuit, or software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software.
  • an apparatus including a module or unit for performing the method in the fifth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect.
  • the module or unit may be a hardware circuit, or software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software.
  • an apparatus including at least one processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store instructions, so as to implement any possible implementation manner in the first aspect to the fifth aspect above method in .
  • the device further includes a memory, and the memory and the processor may be deployed separately or in a centralized manner.
  • the device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
  • a device in a twelfth aspect, includes at least one logic circuit and an input/output interface, the logic circuit is used for coupling with the input/output interface, and data is transmitted through the input/output interface to perform The method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fifth aspect or any one of the first aspect to the fifth aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium which is characterized in that computer-executable instructions are stored, and when the computer-executable instructions are run on a computer, the computer executes the computer according to the first aspect to the fifth aspect. Or the method in any one of the implementation manners from the first aspect to the fifth aspect.
  • a computer program product including: computer program code, when the computer program code is executed, the computer executes any one of the first to fifth aspects or the first to fifth aspects. method in an implementation.
  • a system including the fifth aspect or the device in any one of the implementations of the fifth aspect and the sixth aspect or the device in any one of the implementations of the sixth aspect; or including the fifth aspect Or the device in any implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the seventh aspect or the device in any implementation manner of the seventh aspect, and the eighth aspect or the device in any implementation manner of the eighth aspect.
  • a communication system including the aforementioned first node, second node, and third node.
  • any device, chip system, computer-readable storage medium, or computer program product provided above can be used to implement the corresponding method provided above. Therefore, the beneficial effects that it can achieve can refer to The beneficial effects of the corresponding method will not be repeated here.
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of node position information involved in the beam configuration method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of time delay corresponding to the method shown in FIG. 5 .
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of another beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of another beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of time delay corresponding to the method shown in FIG. 8 .
  • Fig. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 13 is a schematic block diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 14 is a schematic block diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 15 is a schematic block diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 16 is a schematic block diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 17 is a schematic block diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM global system of mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA broadband code Division multiple access
  • general packet radio service general packet radio service
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD LTE time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunications system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • the frequency of electromagnetic waves supported by communication systems is gradually increasing, such as from centimeter waves and millimeter waves less than 100 GHz, to millimeter waves greater than 100 GHz, and then to optical communications of terahertz and hundreds of terahertz.
  • the frequency increases, the diffraction ability of electromagnetic waves becomes worse, the path loss in the propagation process also increases, and the coverage area decreases accordingly.
  • the influence of path loss needs to be reduced.
  • Beamforming is a signal preprocessing technology based on antenna arrays. Specifically, beamforming is used to adjust the weighting coefficients of each array element in the antenna array to generate directional beams, thereby obtaining significant array gain.
  • Massive multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) systems can obtain highly directional and high-gain beams at both ends of the transceiver. Strong directionality also means narrower coverage, and communication tends to be interrupted when you deviate from the coverage of the beam. Therefore, beam alignment at both ends of the transceiver is very important, and beam scanning is the process of determining a suitable communication beam.
  • MIMO multiple-input multiple-output
  • beam scanning needs to be performed to align transmitting and receiving beams. For example, before two devices can communicate, they first need to be synchronized. Each of the two devices needs to perform periodic beam scanning for other devices to discover or discover other devices or establish connections, wherein in each scanning cycle, all beams in the entire or large beam range need to be used respectively Send or receive synchronization signals.
  • 5G new radio New Radio, NR
  • SS block synchronization signal block
  • multiple different synchronization signal blocks can form a synchronization signal block burst set (burst set)
  • the synchronization signal block burst set is transmitted within a time window of 5 ms.
  • the transmission period of the synchronization signal block burst set can be configured as a value in ⁇ 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, 160 ⁇ ms, so 5G NR supports a minimum synchronization beam scanning period of 5 ms.
  • the NR transceiver uses a beam scanning method based on time division multiplexing (TDM) for beam alignment, and the initial access delay is relatively large.
  • TDM time division multiplexing
  • the present application proposes a beam configuration method, which can reduce the overhead and delay of beam scanning, thereby improving access efficiency.
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic architecture diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system includes a plurality of nodes, and any two nodes in the plurality of nodes can discover each other or establish a communication link.
  • the communication system may include a first node 110, a second node 120, and a third node 130, and links may be established between two nodes among the three nodes for communication.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the types of nodes in the communication system.
  • the first node 110, the second node 120, and the third node 130 may all be network devices, or all may be terminal devices, or Some nodes are terminal devices, and some nodes are network devices.
  • any node in FIG. 1 may be a terminal device.
  • a terminal device may also be called user equipment, access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or user device, among others.
  • Terminal equipment includes, but is not limited to: cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), Handheld devices with wireless communication functions, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 6G network or future evolution of public land mobile network (PLMN)
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • Handheld devices with wireless communication functions computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 6G network or future evolution of public land mobile network (PLMN)
  • PLMN public land mobile
  • any node in FIG. 1 may be a network device.
  • a network device may be a device that provides wireless communication functions for terminal devices.
  • the network equipment can be a base transceiver station (BTS) in a global system of mobile communication (GSM) system or code division multiple access (CDMA), or a broadband code division multiple access
  • BTS base transceiver station
  • GSM global system of mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • NB wideband code division multiple access
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • the network device can be a relay station, access point, vehicle-mounted device, wearable device, network device in the future 6G network or network device in the future evolved PLMN network, etc.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the communication system may include at least three nodes.
  • Figure 1 only illustrates the technical solution of the present application by taking the communication system including three nodes as an example.
  • the number of nodes in the following embodiments should not be understood as limiting the application scope of the application limited.
  • any two nodes can communicate based on beamforming.
  • any one of the first node 110, the second node 120, and the third node 130 may have an antenna array.
  • the application scenarios of this application include low-latency and high-reliability communication scenarios, such as in factories, Internet of Vehicles, drones and other communication scenarios.
  • the systems to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable include systems that use high-frequency spectrum communication. Generally, high-frequency spectrum such as millimeter wave, terahertz, and optical communication are used in communication technologies that require beamforming.
  • Fig. 2 shows a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 200 shown in FIG. 2 is applied in a communication system, and the communication system may include a first node, a second node, and a third node.
  • the method 200 may be executed by a coordinating node, where the coordinating node may be any one of the first node, the second node, and the third node.
  • the first node is, for example, the first node 110 in FIG. 1
  • the second node is, for example, the second node 120 in FIG. 1
  • the third node is, for example, the third node 130 in FIG. 1
  • a first link is established between the third node 130 and the first node 110, so the third node 130 and the first node 110 can communicate through the first link.
  • a second link is established between the third node 130 and the second node 120, so the third node 130 and the second node 120 can communicate through the second link.
  • the third link between the first node 110 and the second node 120 may be a link to be established or a beam link to be determined.
  • the method 200 shown in FIG. 2 may be executed by any node in the communication system shown in FIG. 1 , such as the first node 110 , the second node 120 or the third node 130 .
  • the method 200 may include step S210 and step S220, each step will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • the coordination node acquires first information.
  • the first information includes information about candidate beams of the first node and information about candidate beams of the second node.
  • the coordination node may be any one of the first node, the second node and the third node.
  • the coordinating node is configured to perform beam configuration for the first node and the second node.
  • the cooperative node can be predefined or preconfigured by the system, for example, the system can determine the distance according to the current link according to whether one node among the first node, the second node and the third node has strong computing power or has a strong
  • the node is determined to be a cooperative node based on its position and direction (beam angle).
  • the cooperative node may be a roadside unit (RSU).
  • the coordinating node may be determined through negotiation among nodes in the communication system, for example, through negotiation between the first node, the second node, the third node and their nearby nodes. For example, if a certain node can directly or indirectly obtain the relevant information of the first node and/or the second node of the link to be established, and the cooperation by it may have small overhead and short delay, then it can be determined This node is a collaboration node.
  • the cooperative node is a source node or a relay node.
  • the link between the third node and the first node is the first link
  • the first link is an established link, that is, there is a configured link between the first node and the third node.
  • the link between the third node and the second node is the second link, and the second link is also an established link, and the second node and the third node can use configured beams and resources for data transmission.
  • data transmission cannot be directly performed between the first node and the second node. There are no resources or other configuration information corresponding to transmit beams or receive beams.
  • the resources involved may be time-frequency resources based on time division multiplexing or frequency division multiplexing (frequency division multiplex, FDM), or space resources based on space division multiplexing.
  • the first information acquired by the coordinating node may be that the coordinating node receives the information of the candidate beam of the first node reported by the first node; and/or, the coordinating node receives the candidate beam of the second node reported by the second node Information.
  • the first node and/or the second node reports information about its candidate beams.
  • the first node and/or the second node can proactively report the information of their respective candidate beams, for example, report periodically, so that the coordinating nodes can know the information of the candidate beams of the first node and/or the second node in advance , while reducing the delay, there is no need for the cooperative node to send request instructions, reducing the overhead of information interaction.
  • the first node and/or the second node may report the information of the respective candidate beams in response to the request of the coordination node.
  • the coordinating node may also perform the following actions: send the first request information to the first node, and the first request information is used to instruct the first node to report the information of the candidate beam of the first node ; and/or sending second request information to the second node, where the second request information is used to instruct the second node to report the information of the candidate beams of the second node.
  • the coordinating node when the coordinating node is the first node, before acquiring the first information, the coordinating node may send second request information to the second node, where the second request information is used to instruct the second node to report the information of the candidate beam of the second node.
  • the first node may directly acquire the information of the candidate beams of the first node from itself.
  • the coordinating node when the coordinating node is the second node, before the coordinating node obtains the first information, it may send the first request information to the first node, and the first request information is used to instruct the first node to report the candidate beam information of the first node .
  • the second node may directly acquire the information of the candidate beams of the second node from itself.
  • the coordinating node when the coordinating node is the third node, before the coordinating node obtains the first information, it may send the first request information to the first node, and the first request information is used to instruct the first node to report the information of the candidate beam of the first node ; and sending second request information to the second node, where the second request information is used to instruct the second node to report the information of the candidate beams of the second node.
  • the first node before the first node sends the information of the candidate beam of the first node to the cooperating node, the first node receives the first request information of the coordinating node; and/or, the second node sends the candidate beam of the second node to the coordinating node before receiving the beam information, the second node receives the second request information from the coordinating node.
  • the first node and/or the second node should report the information of their respective candidate beams at the request of the coordination node.
  • the above request may be that the coordinating node knows the data to be sent or the coordinating node estimates that the distance between the first node and the second node is less than a certain threshold, thereby triggering the sending of the request information.
  • the request information is optional, and the coordinating node sends a request message to the first node and/or the second node, which can make the first node and/or the second node according to the needs of the coordinating node Then report relevant information to ensure timely and effective information transmission of candidate beams.
  • the information of the candidate beams includes information related to at least one of the angle range and the geographic range.
  • the information about the candidate beams of the first node or the second node may include information about all the beams of the first node or the second node or the beam corresponding to the configured maximum number of beams.
  • the angle range is not limited or is 360°, so that the information of the candidate beams of the first node or the second node includes information of all beams of the first node or the second node or the beam corresponding to the configured maximum number of beams.
  • the information about the candidate beams of the first node may include information about some beams of the first node.
  • the information of the candidate beams of the first node includes information of beams in a certain angle range or geographic location range, or a subset of the corresponding configured maximum number of beams.
  • the above-mentioned angle may be, for example, a beam in the range of 0-180°.
  • the geographic location can also correspond to the angle.
  • the coordinates of the second node are in the north direction of the first node. When the first node communicates with the second node, you can only select 90° west by north to 90° east by north for a total of 180° Beams within the angular range of , are used as candidate beams.
  • the above-mentioned angle range may be that the first node and/or the second node each determine to report only the beam information within this range, or that the coordinating node sends a relevant message before requesting information or carries restrictions on the reported beam angle range in the request information
  • the coordinating node may determine a certain range of angles according to the determined direction of the third link, or the limited angle may use the direction of the currently connected link as a reference.
  • the reporting overhead of the first node and/or the second node can be reduced.
  • the information of the candidate beam of the first node includes at least one of the index of the candidate beam of the first node, the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node, and the number of candidate beams of the first node
  • the information of the candidate beam of the second node includes at least one of the index of the candidate beam of the second node, the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the second node, and the number of the candidate beam of the second node.
  • the information of the candidate beam of the first node may include at least one of the index of the candidate beam of the first node and the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node; the information of the candidate beam of the second node includes The index of the candidate beam of the second node and the index of the candidate beam of the second node correspond to at least one of the angles.
  • the information of the candidate beam of the first node may only include the index of the candidate beam of the first node.
  • the information of the candidate beams of the first node may only include the angles of the candidate beams of the first node.
  • the information of the candidate beam of the first node may include an index of the candidate beam of the first node and an angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node.
  • Table 1 shows examples of the index of the beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the beam in the two-dimensional coordinate system, where ⁇ is the corresponding horizontal angle, that is, the angle between the geographic north direction and the beam direction along the counterclockwise direction:
  • the 180-degree angular range can be divided into 16 equal parts in the two-dimensional coordinate system, the index of the [0, 11.25°) beam is 0, and the index of the [11.25°, 22.5°) beam is 1...[168.75 °, 180°) the index of the beam is 15.
  • the coordinating node when the coordinating node finally determines that the sending/receiving beam range of a node is 20-40°, the corresponding beam index can be 1, 2 or 3, and the coordinating node can further determine the node’s Send or receive beams.
  • the corresponding relationship between the index of the beam and the angle ⁇ in Table 1 is only given schematically. In other cases, there may be more or fewer beams in the same angular range due to narrower or wider beams. For example, if the radiation range of each beam is 60°, there are 3 beams within the range of 180°; if the radiation range of each beam is only 5°, there are 36 beams within the range of 180°.
  • the determination of the radiation range of the beam is related to factors such as the transmitting power of the antenna, the number and arrangement of the antenna, and will not be described in detail here.
  • Table 2 shows a corresponding relationship between the direction of the transmitting and receiving beam and the index of the beam in the three-dimensional coordinate system, where ⁇ is the corresponding horizontal angle, that is, the angle between the geographic north direction and the beam direction along the counterclockwise direction, ⁇ is the vertical angle, and the vertical direction is 0 degrees, and the horizontal direction is 90 degrees.
  • Table 2 schematically shows the index of the beam in the three-dimensional coordinate system and the angle range corresponding to the index of the beam, and the corresponding relationship may also vary with the actual situation.
  • the index of the candidate beam can be understood as a code for distinguishing the candidate beam, and the corresponding angle is the main coverage area of the beam.
  • the index of the beam and/or the corresponding angle of the index of the beam is to distinguish the beams in various directions of the same node, so the information that can distinguish the beams according to the direction or can be converted into information corresponding to the direction can be used as
  • Candidate beam information may include beam number, beam management resource number, uplink signal resource number, downlink signal resource number, sidelink signal resource number, absolute index of beam, relative index of beam, logical index of beam, beam
  • the information of the candidate beams of the first node may include the number of candidate beams of the first node
  • the information of the candidate beams of the second node includes the number of candidate beams of the second node. The number of candidate beams is sent by the first node and/or the second node to the coordination node.
  • the coordinating node when the coordinating node is the third node, the first node and the second node send the respective numbers of candidate beams to the coordinating node.
  • the third node receives the respective numbers of candidate beams sent by the first node and the second node.
  • the second node may determine the number of candidate beams of the second node according to the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node.
  • the second node determines the distance and direction of the line between the two nodes according to the location information of the node on the opposite side of the link or the target node obtained from the coordination node, and the distance and direction may be calculated based on the geometric relationship. According to the obtained direction, the second node may select several beams whose angles are close to the link direction from all its own beams, thereby using the several beams as candidate beams, and determining the number of candidate beams according to the several beams.
  • the process of determining the number of candidate beams by the first node and the second node is as follows:
  • Step 1 the coordinating node obtains the location information of the first node and the second node;
  • Step 2 the coordinating node sends the location information of the first node to the second node, and sends the location information of the second node to the first node;
  • Step 3 the first node determines the number of its own candidate beams according to the location information of the second node and its own location information, and the second node determines the number of its own candidate beams according to the location information of the first node and its own location information ;
  • Step 4 the first node and the second node send information about their respective candidate beams to the coordinating node for subsequent processing.
  • the second node when the coordinating node is the first node, the second node sends the number of its candidate beams to the first node through the third node.
  • the first node sends its own location information to the second node through the first link and the second link, and the second node may also send its own location information to the first node through the second link and the first link, Therefore, both the first node and the second node can obtain the location information of both parties.
  • the second node determines the number of its own candidate beams according to the location information of the first node, and the first node determines the number of its own candidate beams according to the location information of the second node.
  • the second node sends the number of its candidate beams to the first node, so that the first node coordinates and configures the beam information.
  • the first node when the coordinating node is the second node, the first node sends the number of its candidate beams to the second node through the third node.
  • the first information may further include at least one of the first sub-information and the second sub-information, the first sub-information includes the direction of the first link, the distance of the first link, the second The direction of the link and the distance of the second link, the second sub-information includes the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node; wherein, the first link is between the first node and the third node link, the second link is a link between the second node and the third node.
  • the direction of the first link is the general direction of the connection between the third node and the first node.
  • the direction of the first link can be obtained through the sending or receiving beam of the first node or the third node. Since the beam corresponds to a certain Therefore, corresponding to the first link, when the first node and the third node transmit data, the direction of the beam used is roughly the direction of the connection line between the first node and the third node.
  • the distance of the first link is the distance between the first node and the third node, which can also be called the length of the first link
  • the distance of the second link is the distance between the second node and the third node, and can be called the length of the second link.
  • the distance of the first link can be calculated by the time difference between the sending and receiving signals between the third node and the first node.
  • the third node can send a reference signal to the first node, and the third node can use The distance of the first link is calculated from the time difference until the first node receives the reference signal.
  • the coordinating node is the third node, and the coordinating node can directly determine the direction of the first link according to the direction of the beam used for communication with the first node, and determine the distance of the first link;
  • the direction of the beam used in the communication of the nodes determines the direction of the second link, and determines the distance of the second link, so as to obtain the first sub-information.
  • the coordinating node is the first node, and the coordinating node can directly determine the direction of the first link and the distance of the first link according to the beam used for communication with the third node; and for the second link direction and distance, the link between the third node and the second node is the second link, the direction of the second link can be directly determined by the third node according to the beam communicating with the second node, and the third node Determine the distance of the second link.
  • the third node can report the distance of the second link to the first node through the long-period distance report and short-period micro-distance update, and the long-period direction report and short-period micro-direction update will report the distance of the second link to the first node.
  • the direction of the road is reported to the first node, so that the coordinating node obtains the first sub-information.
  • the situation that the coordinating node is the second node is similar to that of the first node, and will not be repeated here.
  • This long-period distance or direction reporting and micro-distance or direction updating can save reporting overhead.
  • the position information of the first node and the position information of the second node can be the coordinates of the first node and the second node, can be absolute coordinates, can also be relative coordinates, can be global coordinate system (global coordinate system, GCS) or coordinates in the local coordinate system (local coordinate system, LCS).
  • GCS global coordinate system
  • LCS local coordinate system
  • the location information may be a geographic location range, such as a coordinate range.
  • the area where the three nodes are located may be divided into grids, so as to determine the location information of the nodes.
  • Fig. 3 shows a schematic diagram of node position information involved in the beam configuration method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the area of 8m*8m can be divided into 64 grids of 1m*1m. Therefore, only six binary numbers are needed to distinguish 64 grids. For example, it is stipulated that the decimal number corresponding to each row increases from the left. , the decimal number corresponding to each vertical line increases from bottom to top, then the grid point coordinates closest to the coordinate origin are (0-1, 0-1), the corresponding decimal number is 0, and the corresponding binary number is (000000), The coordinates of the farthest grid point from the origin are (7-8, 7-8), corresponding to the decimal number 63, and the corresponding binary number to (111111). For example, the coordinates of position x are (2-3, 5-6), then the corresponding decimal number is 42, and the corresponding binary number is (101010).
  • the area can also be divided into other numbers of grids, such as 32, 128, 256, etc., which can be designed according to actual needs. For example, if higher positioning accuracy is required, the grid can be set smaller, and the fixed area includes a larger number of grids. If lower positioning accuracy is required, the grid can be set larger, and the fixed area includes a smaller number of grids, which can reduce storage and information reporting overhead. In other words, the grid size of the location area is related to the positioning accuracy, the higher the accuracy, the smaller the grid, and the lower the accuracy, the larger the grid.
  • the origin of the above-mentioned gridded coordinates can be set arbitrarily, and can be a grid in a relative coordinate system or a grid in an absolute coordinate system.
  • the origin is set as any one of the first node, the second node or the third node.
  • the collaborative node or other nodes only need to quantify the area within the grid range, which can reduce the overhead of reporting and storing position information compared to directly reporting the coordinates of the nodes.
  • the coordinated node determines beam information of the first node and beam information of the second node according to the first information.
  • the following takes the first node as the sending node of the third link and the second node as the receiving node of the third link as an example to introduce S220.
  • the first node is the third link
  • the receiving node of the road is used, the first node and the second node can be completely interchanged without affecting the technical solution of this application.
  • the information of the candidate beams of the first node includes at least One item; the information of the candidate beams of the second node includes at least one of the index of the candidate beams of the second node, the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beams of the second node, and the number of the candidate beams of the second node.
  • the beam information of the first node includes the index of the transmit beam and/or the index of the transmit beam of the first node corresponds to the angle
  • the beam information of the second node includes the index of the receive beam of the second node and/or The index of the receiving beam of the second node corresponds to the angle
  • the sending beam of the first node may be a certain sending beam, or may be multiple sending beams. There may be one or more receiving beams of the second node. Since the transmit beam belongs to the subset of candidate transmit beams and the receive beam belongs to the subset of candidate receive beams, the first node or the second node performs beam scanning in a smaller range, reducing the beam density of the first node and the second node. Scanning overhead reduces latency and energy consumption.
  • the index and/or the angle corresponding to the index is also for distinguishing different beams of each node, and the index of the beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the beam can be the same as the above-mentioned index of the candidate beam and/or the index of the candidate beam Similar extensions are made for corresponding angles.
  • the information of the candidate beams of the first node includes the number of candidate beams of the first node; the information of the candidate beams of the second node includes the number of candidate beams of the second node.
  • the meaning and acquisition process of the number of candidate beams have been given in S210, for the sake of brevity, no more details are given here.
  • the beam information of the first node includes a transmitting beam sequence of the first node
  • the beam information of the second node includes a receiving beam sequence of the second node
  • the sending beams can be recorded as Tx0, Tx1
  • the receiving beams can be recorded as Rx0, Rx1
  • the coordinating node can determine the sending beam sequence as Tx0-Tx0-Tx1-Tx1
  • the receiving beam The beam sequence is Rx0-Rx1-Rx0-Rx1, so that when the sending node and the receiving node perform beam scanning, four pairs of sending-receiving beam pairs will be generated, which are Tx0-Rx0, Tx0-Rx1, Tx1-Rx0, Tx1- Rx1, thereby being able to include all four beam pairing situations.
  • the coordinating node when the coordinating node configures the beam sequence, it does not need to know the information of the actual beam, such as the angle, etc., and can use the virtual beam index such as the above-mentioned Tx0, Tx1, Rx0, Rx1 according to the number of beams to configure the transmission Or the receiving beam sequence can enable the first node and the second node to traverse all sending/receiving beam combinations when performing beam pairing, so that a better quality beam pair can be further selected for data transmission.
  • the coordinated node determines the beam information of the first node and the beam information of the second node according to the first information.
  • the coordinating nodes correspond to angles according to the index of the candidate beam of the first node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the first node, the index of the candidate beam of the second node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the second node
  • the index corresponds to the angle
  • the index of the transmit beam of the first node and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the transmit beam of the first node, the index of the receive beam of the second node and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the receive beam of the second node are determined.
  • the coordinating node can determine the beam index and/or the first The index of the beam of the node and the second node corresponds to the angle.
  • the first node and the second node scan within the corresponding beam range, reducing the beam scan range of the first node and the second node, and reducing scanning overhead and time delay.
  • the coordinating node determines the beam information of the first node according to at least one of the first sub-information and the second sub-information and the information of the candidate beam of the first node; the coordinating node determines the beam information of the first node according to the first sub-information and At least one item of the second sub-information and the information of the candidate beams of the second node determine the beam information of the second node.
  • the first sub-information determines the index of the transmitting beam of the first node and/or the corresponding angle of the index, the index of the receiving beam of the second node and/or the corresponding angle of the index, the first sub-information includes the distance and direction of the first link, The distance and direction of the second link.
  • the coordinating node determines the direction of the third link according to the first sub-information, and according to the direction of the third link, combined with the indexes and/or corresponding angles of the candidate beams of the first node and the second node, from the candidate beams of the first node
  • the beam whose angle is close to the direction of the third link is selected as the sending beam of the first node
  • the beam whose angle is close to the direction of the third link is selected from the second node as the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the first node performs beam scanning within the range of the sending beam
  • the second node performs beam scanning within the range of the receiving beam, thereby reducing the beam scanning range of the first node and the second node, and reducing overhead and delay.
  • the coordinating node can determine the direction and distance of the third link according to the first sub-information, that is, the direction and distance of the first link and the direction and distance of the second link.
  • the direction of the first link and the direction of the second link can determine the angle between the first link and the second link, combined with the distance of the first link and the distance of the second link, according to the first
  • the distance and direction of the third link can be calculated from the geometric properties of the triangle formed by the node, the second node and the third node.
  • the coordinating node corresponds to the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the first node, the index of the candidate beam of the second node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the second node.
  • the angle and the second sub-information determine the index of the transmitting beam of the first node and/or the corresponding angle of the index, the index of the receiving beam of the second node and/or the corresponding angle of the index, and the second sub-information includes the position information of the first node, the second Node location information.
  • the coordinating node corresponds to the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the first node, the index of the candidate beam of the second node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the second node.
  • the angle, the second sub-information, and the first sub-information determine the index of the transmitting beam of the first node and/or the angle corresponding to the index, the index of the receiving beam of the second node and/or the corresponding angle of the index, and the second sub-information includes the index of the first node Location information, location information of the second node.
  • This embodiment is a combination of the above two, and for specific content, please refer to the description of related content above, for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the coordinating node determines the direction of the third link according to the second sub-information, and according to the direction of the third link, combined with the indexes and/or corresponding angles of the candidate beams of the first node and the second node, from the candidate beams of the first node
  • the beam whose angle is close to the direction of the third link is selected as the sending beam of the first node
  • the beam whose angle is close to the direction of the third link is selected from the second node as the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the first node performs beam scanning within the range of the sending beam
  • the second node performs beam scanning within the range of the receiving beam, thereby reducing the beam scanning range of the first node and the second node, and reducing overhead and delay.
  • the coordinating node can determine the distance and direction of the third link according to the second sub-information, that is, the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node. Specifically, when the location information is coordinates, the coordinating node can easily determine the distance and direction of the third link according to the coordinates of the first node and the coordinates of the second node according to the geometric relationship.
  • the coordinating node can use a certain point within the geographic location range of the first node and the second node, such as the center of the geometry, as the coordinates of the first node and the second node, and then based on the above geometric method to calculate the direction and distance of the third link; or, the geographic location range of the first node and the second node can be processed, and it can be calculated that when a point is taken as the two coordinates within the two geographic location ranges, the two The angle range and distance range of the connecting line can be regarded as the direction range and distance range of the third link.
  • the distance range and direction range of the third link are known, and according to the distance range and direction range, the index of the candidate beam of the first node and the second node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the first node and the second node correspond to Angle, select the beam whose angle is close to the direction of the third link from the candidate beams of the first node as the sending beam of the first node, and select the beam whose angle is close to the direction of the third link from the second node , as the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the first node performs beam scanning within the range of the sending beam
  • the second node performs beam scanning within the range of the receiving beam, thereby reducing the beam scanning range of the first node and the second node, and reducing overhead and delay.
  • the coordinating node determines the sending beam sequence of the first node and the receiving beam sequence of the second node according to the number of candidate beams of the first node and the number of candidate beams of the second node.
  • the coordinating node configures the transmitting beam sequence for the first node, and configures the receiving beam sequence for the second node, so that when the first node and the second node scan according to the beam sequence , can quickly perform beam alignment, select the optimal beam, and reduce the delay and overhead of beam scanning.
  • the process of determining the number of post-selected beams has been introduced in detail above, so it will be concise here and will not be repeated here.
  • the coordinating node corresponds to the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the first node, the index of the candidate beam of the second node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the second node.
  • the angle and the first sub-information determine the sending beam sequence of the first node and the receiving beam sequence of the second node, and the first sub-information includes the distance and direction of the first link and the distance and direction of the second link.
  • the coordinating node can combine the direction of the third link determined by the first sub-information according to the index of the first node candidate wave velocity and/or the corresponding angle of the index, the index of the second node candidate wave velocity and/or the corresponding angle of the index , determine the beam index and / index corresponding angle of the first node and the second node, so as to further determine the number of candidate beams of the first node and the second node, and determine the transmission beam sequence of the first node according to the number of candidate beams and the receiving beam sequence of the second node. Beam alignment is performed according to the beam sequence, the optimal beam pair is quickly matched, and the beam scanning delay and overhead are reduced.
  • the coordinating node corresponds to the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the first node, the index of the candidate beam of the second node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the second node.
  • the angle and the second sub-information determine the transmitting beam sequence of the first node and the receiving beam sequence of the second node, and the second sub-information includes position information of the first node and position information of the second node.
  • the coordinating node can combine the direction of the third link determined by the second sub-information according to the index of the first node candidate wave velocity and/or the corresponding angle of the index, the index of the second node candidate wave velocity and/or the corresponding angle of the index Range, determine the beam index and / index corresponding angle of the first node and the second node, so as to further determine the number of candidate beams of the first node and the second node, according to the number of candidate beams, determine the transmission beam of the first node sequence and the receive beam sequence of the second node. Beam alignment is performed according to the beam sequence, the optimal beam pair is quickly matched, and the beam scanning delay and overhead are reduced.
  • the coordinating node corresponds to the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the first node, the index of the candidate beam of the second node and/or the index of the candidate beam of the second node.
  • the angle, the first sub-information, and the second sub-information determine the sending beam sequence of the first node and the receiving beam sequence of the second node.
  • the coordinating node can determine the angle of the corresponding beam according to the index, then according to the third sub-information determined according to the first sub-information and/or the second sub-information, The direction of the link, select the beam corresponding to the index with an angle similar to that of the third link as the transmitting beam of the first node or the receiving beam of the second node, and then send the index to the first node and/or the second node, The first node and the second node use the beam corresponding to the index to perform beam scanning, thereby reducing the beam scanning range, reducing beam scanning overhead and time delay.
  • the information of the candidate beam only includes the angle of the candidate beam
  • the coordinating node directly determines the transmission beam of the first node according to the angle and the direction of the third link determined according to the first sub-information and/or the second sub-information and the angle of the receiving beam of the second node, so that the first node and the second node use the beam corresponding to the angle to perform beam scanning, reduce the range of beam scanning, and reduce overhead and delay.
  • the coordinating node only needs to coordinate sending or receiving beams in a small number of beams, and further reduces the coordinating overhead of the coordinating node.
  • the coordinating node may also decide whether to trigger configuration of beam information of the first node and/or the second node according to the distance of the third link determined according to the first information and/or the second information.
  • the distance of the third link is greater than the preset threshold, even if the corresponding beam information is configured for the first node and/or the second node, the quality of the final channel may not meet the requirements, so there is no need for It configures the corresponding beams.
  • the distance of the third link is less than the preset threshold, the channel quality may be better, and corresponding beams may be configured for it.
  • the coordinating node sends first indication information to the first node, and the first indication information includes beam information of the first node; and/or, the coordinating node sends second indication information to the second node, and the first indication information includes beam information of the first node;
  • the two indication information includes beam information of the second node.
  • the first node receives the first indication information from the coordination node
  • the second node receives the second indication information from the coordination node
  • the coordinating node After the coordinating node determines the beam information of the first node and/or the second node, it can send the corresponding indication information to the first node and/or the second node, instructing the first node and/or the second node to use the corresponding
  • the beams are scanned or scanned according to the corresponding sequence to reduce the delay and overhead of beam scanning.
  • the coordinating node may configure corresponding beam information for the first node and the second node, and send the first indication information including the beam information of the first node to the first node, Send the second indication information including the beam information of the second node to the second node.
  • the coordinating node may configure beam information for the second node, and send second indication information including the beam information of the second node to the second node, and the coordinating node may also configure beam information for itself, thereby communicating with the second node.
  • beam information may be configured for the first node, and first indication information including the beam information of the first node may be sent to the first node.
  • the coordinating node prefferably configures the beam information for the second node and send the second indication information containing the beam information of the second node to the second node, and the second node can directly perform blind scanning to communicate with the second node One node communication.
  • the information exchanged between the coordination node and the first node and/or the second node includes a lot of information related to the coordinate system such as angles and positions. Therefore, flexible and effective configuration of related information by the coordinating node requires that the coordinating node and the first node and/or the second node have the same understanding of the received information related to the coordinate system.
  • the first node and/or the second node use the same coordinate system, which can satisfy the same condition as understood above, regardless of whether the same coordinate system is GCS or LCS.
  • the coordinate system used between the coordinating node and the first node and/or the second node is different, and a coordinate system transformation process needs to be performed before beam information is determined.
  • LCS uses the conversion coefficient to convert to GCS, and then performs beam configuration.
  • the coordination node is the third node as an example, there is a link of a beam to be established or determined between the first node and the second node.
  • the third node uses GCS, the first node and the second node use LCS1, LCS2 respectively, the third node knows the coordinate conversion coefficients of the first node and the second node, and the conversion coefficient used to convert the coordinates of LCS1 into GCS coordinates is ( ⁇ 1, ⁇ 1, ⁇ 1), the conversion coefficient used to convert the LCS2 coordinates into GCS coordinates is ( ⁇ 2, ⁇ 2, ⁇ 2), for example, the coordinate conversion coefficient may be a matrix.
  • the coordinating node receives the coordinate-related variable A of the first node using LCS1, such as the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam, and first converts the variable A into A1 under the GCS with ( ⁇ 1, ⁇ 1, ⁇ 1) , and then configure, for example, use the index of the candidate beam under GCS and/or the corresponding angle of the index of the candidate beam to configure the index of the beam and/or the corresponding angle of the index of the beam, and configure the index of the beam under the GCS and/or the corresponding angle of the beam.
  • the angle corresponding to the index of is converted to the index of the beam under LCS1 by using the coordinate conversion coefficient and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the beam is sent to the first node, thereby completing the configuration.
  • the coordinating node converts the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam into the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam (GCS) , that is, only the configured index can be sent to the first node, thereby reducing the coordinate transformation process once.
  • the coordinating node is a third node, and a beam link is to be established or determined between the first node and the second node.
  • the third node uses LCS3, and the first and second nodes use GCS.
  • the coordinating node receives the index of the candidate beam under the GCS of the first node and/or the corresponding angle of the index of the candidate beam, and the coordinating node receives the coordinate conversion coefficient ( ⁇ 3, ⁇ 3 , ⁇ 3), the third node converts part of the parameters of the third node into parameters under the GCS according to the coordinate conversion coefficient, so that the index of the candidate beam under the GCS of the first node and/or the corresponding angle of the index of the candidate beam can be directly used, Configure the index of the beam under the GCS and/or the corresponding angle of the index of the beam for the first node. After the configuration is completed, directly set the index of the candidate beam of the first node under the configured GCS and/or the index of the candidate beam of the first node The corresponding angle is sent to the first node.
  • the third node can also convert the candidate beam information of the first node and/or the second node under GCS into information of candidate beams under LCS3, convert the beam information into information under GCS after configuring the beam information, and then send the information to the first node and/or the second node.
  • the above process is similar to the above, except that the direction of coordinate conversion is different, so the coordinate conversion coefficient also needs to be changed accordingly.
  • the coordinating node in addition to configuring the beam, can also obtain the second information, the second information includes the candidate resource information of the first node and the candidate resource information of the second node; the coordinating node determines according to the second information
  • the sending resource information of the first node and the receiving resource information of the second node the sending resource information of the first node is used to indicate the resource of the sending beam of the first node, and the receiving resource information of the second node is used to indicate the receiving resource information of the second node Beam resources.
  • the first node and the second node report their respective candidate resource information.
  • the first node and/or the second node actively report their candidate resource information, for example, through periodic reporting, so that the coordinating node can obtain the candidate resource information of the first node and the second node in advance, and provide corresponding
  • the sending or receiving beam configures the corresponding resources, thereby reducing the signaling interaction overhead and reducing the delay, so that when one node sends, the other node receives, which is convenient for duplex matching and avoids resource conflicts.
  • the first node and/or the second node may report their own candidate resource information in response to the request of the coordination node.
  • the coordinating node may also perform the following operations: send third request information to the first node, where the third request information is used to instruct the first node to report candidate resource information of the first node; And/or sending fourth request information to the second node, where the fourth request information is used to instruct the second node to report candidate resource information of the second node.
  • the coordinating node may send fourth request information to the second node, where the fourth request information is used to instruct the second node to report candidate resource information of the second node.
  • the first node may directly acquire the candidate resource information of the first node from itself.
  • the coordinating node may send third request information to the first node before obtaining the second information, and the third request information is used to instruct the first node to report candidate resource information of the first node.
  • the second node may directly acquire the candidate resource information of the second node from itself.
  • the coordinating node when the coordinating node is the third node, before the coordinating node obtains the second information, it may send third request information to the first node, and the third request information is used to instruct the first node to report candidate resource information of the first node; And/or, send fourth request information to the second node, where the fourth request information is used to instruct the second node to report candidate resource information of the second node.
  • the first node before the first node sends the candidate resource information of the first node to the coordinating node, the first node receives the third request information of the coordinating node; and/or, before the second node sends the candidate resource of the second node to the coordinating node Before receiving the information, the second node receives the fourth request information from the coordination node.
  • the first node and/or the second node should report their candidate resource information at the request of the coordinating node.
  • the above request may be that the coordinating node knows the data to be sent, thereby triggering the sending of the request information.
  • the request information is optional, and the coordinating node sends a request message to the first node and/or the second node, which can make the first node and/or the second node according to the needs of the coordinating node Then report relevant information to ensure timely and effective information transmission of candidate beams.
  • the second information above can be acquired together with the above first information, or can be acquired separately from the first information.
  • the coordinating node is the third node, it can send different request information to the first node and the second node to request candidate resource information, or send a request message with the same content to the first node and the second node to request the candidate of the first node Resource information and candidate resource information of the second node, so that the first node and the second node respectively send their respective and candidate resource information in response to the request message.
  • Candidate resource information may be used to indicate candidate resources of the first node or the second node, such as time-frequency resources, space resources, and the like.
  • the candidate resources may be available resources or idle resources of the first node or the second node, or may be dedicated resources of the first node or the second node.
  • the information of candidate resources may include but not limited to resource index, resource number and so on.
  • the coordinating node obtains the candidate resource information of the first node and the second node, and configures resources corresponding to the above beam information, so as to facilitate duplex matching and avoid resources used by the third link from being used by other links of the first node or the second node The resources on the .
  • the coordinating node can better configure corresponding resources for the first node and the second node according to the number of candidate beams, that is, configure corresponding receiving resources, sending resources, or feedback resources for each candidate beam.
  • the receiving resource of the second node may be configured by the coordinating node, or may be blind-scanned by the receiving end to receive data or signaling.
  • the coordinating node performs at least one of the following operations: sending the sending resource information of the first node to the first node; or sending the receiving resource information of the second node to the second node; wherein, the first node's The sending resource information is used to indicate the resource of the sending beam of the first node, and the receiving resource information of the second node is used to indicate the resource of the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the coordinating node may send configured resource information to the first node and the second node, thereby avoiding resource conflicts.
  • the coordinating node can also obtain the third information, the third information includes the distance information between the first node and the second node, the antenna gain information of the first node on the first link, the antenna gain information of the second node on the At least one of the antenna gain information of the second link and the path loss information of the third link predicted by the coordination node, where the third link is a link used for communication between the first node and the second node; the coordination node According to the third information, the transmission power of the first node is determined.
  • the first node sends antenna gain information of the first node on the first link to the coordinating node, and/or the second node sends antenna gain information of the second node on the second link to the coordinating node for determining The transmit power of the first node on the third link.
  • the information obtained from the first node and/or the second node in the above-mentioned third information can also be obtained in the same manner as the above-mentioned first information and second information, and the process will not be repeated.
  • the coordinating node determines the third link according to the distance of the third link, the prediction of the path loss information of the coordinating node for the third link, and the transmitting or receiving antenna gain of the first node and/or the second node for the third link.
  • the transmit power of the three links is not limited to the distance of the third link, the prediction of the path loss information of the coordinating node for the third link, and the transmitting or receiving antenna gain of the first node and/or the second node for the third link. The transmit power of the three links.
  • the coordinating node when the coordinating node is the second node or the third node, the coordinating node sends the transmission power information of the first node to the first node, and the transmission power information of the first node is used to indicate the transmission power of the first node. power.
  • the first node receives the sending power information from the coordinating node, and performs data transmission with corresponding power.
  • the coordinating node may send power information to the first node, so that the first node can send data to the second node with proper power.
  • the coordinating node When the coordinating node is the first node, the coordinating node configures sending power for itself, so as to send data to the second node with proper power.
  • the coordinating node may also determine the feedback resource information of the second node, the feedback resource information of the second node is used to indicate the feedback resource of the second node, and the feedback resource is used to feed back to the coordinating node the information of the first node and At least one of the beam pairing state between the second nodes, the data transmission state between the first node and the second node, and the channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • the feedback resource information of the second node may be determined according to the fourth information obtained by the coordination node, and the fourth information includes the candidate resource information of the second node and the resource of the receiving beam of the second node, the second At least one item of receiving beam information of the node.
  • the second node sends fourth information to the coordinating node, which is used for the coordinating node to determine the feedback resource information of the second node, and the feedback resource information of the second node is used to indicate the feedback resource of the second node, wherein the feedback resource is used to provide
  • the coordination node feeds back at least one of beam pairing status between the first node and the second node, data transmission status between the first node and the second node, and channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • Feedback resources can be indicated by the feedback resource information sent by the coordination node to the second node, or can be determined by the second node in a predefined or preconfigured manner, such as preconfiguring each receiving or transmitting beam and its corresponding feedback resource for measurement feedback .
  • the feedback information sent by the second node may also include a beam index or a beam pair index.
  • a beam index or a beam pair index When more than one or a pair of beams or beam pairs are fed back, different beams or beam pairs are fed back, so that the cooperative node can combine the feedback information with the beam or beam pair correspondence.
  • the second node may obtain the fourth information from itself without sending process.
  • the transmission of the fourth information may be similar to the transmission of the first, second, and third information, or may be combined with other information for transmission, which will not be repeated here.
  • the feedback content can include the beam pairing status and the corresponding beam pair index.
  • the feedback content may only include the index of the receiving beam, so that the coordinating node can know the pairing situation corresponding to each beam pair, and the index may also be other parameters that can distinguish each beam.
  • the coordinating node can receive NACK feedback for the beam, and the node to establish a link can reselect the beam pair determined as the third link from other beam pairs paired by the coordinating node. And feed back the new beam pair for this link. If the coordinating node configures only one pair of transmitting and receiving beams, receiving the NACK feedback may also trigger the coordinating node to reconfigure beams for the first node and/or the second node.
  • Feedback on the data transmission status on the third link may also be fed back through ACK/NACK.
  • the first node or the second node may use the sending or receiving beam configured by the coordinating node to perform transmission with corresponding sending power.
  • the reference signal or pilot signal may be transmitted first, and then feedback such as reference signal received power (reference signal received power, RSRP), signal to interference plus noise ratio (signal to interference plus noise ratio, SINR) to the coordinating node ) and other parameters describing the channel quality.
  • reference signal received power reference signal received power
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • the coordinating node when the coordinating node sends the sending/receiving beam configured for the link node to be established to the corresponding node, the data to be transmitted may be transmitted on the beam at the same time.
  • the first node or the second node needs to feed back the pairing status and channel quality of the pilot signal first, and then perform the process of data transmission, which can greatly reduce the time of data transmission.
  • the first node or the second node can directly feed back the data, and feed back ACK/NACK and channel quality. If the coordinating node receives NACK feedback for the data, it triggers retransmission of the data.
  • the coordinating node Before the first node or the second node feeds back the beam pairing result and channel quality to the cooperating node, the coordinating node can also determine its feedback beam pairing according to the available resources, data transmission/reception resources, and control transmission/reception resources of the newly established link node The result and channel quality resources, the first node or the second node can feed back to the coordinating node on the corresponding resources.
  • the first node and the second node when the coordinating node determines the transmission beam sequence and the receiving beam sequence on the third link, the first node and the second node can perform beam scanning according to the instructions of the coordinating node, and then select a link with a lower communication quality. Higher beam pairs for data transmission. Therefore, the transmission power, feedback resources, feedback content, transmission beam resources, and reception beam resources configured by the above coordinated nodes are also applicable to this situation.
  • the coordinating node performs at least one of the following operations: the coordinating node sends first indication information to the first node, and the first indication information includes beam information of the first node; or, the coordinating node sends the second node to the second node Two indication information, where the second indication information includes beam information of the second node.
  • the coordinating node may send the beam information, resource information, feedback resource information, and transmission power information configured for the first node and/or the second node in the same signaling by the coordinating node, for example,
  • the aforementioned first instruction information and second instruction information may also be transmitted separately, and this application does not limit the form of sending the information.
  • the above-mentioned system composed of the first node, the second node, and the third node may include a source node, a relay node, and a sink node.
  • the source node-relay node link the source node is the data sending node
  • the relay node is the data receiving node.
  • the relay node-sink node link the relay node is a data sending node
  • the sink node is a data receiving node.
  • the source node is the data sending node
  • the sink node is the data receiving node.
  • the coordinating node may be any one of the above-mentioned source node, relay node, and sink node.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the coordinating node is determined as the third node. Taking the first node as the sending node on the third link as an example, the technical solution corresponding to FIG. 2 is introduced from the perspective of signaling interaction. Similar to the situation of the sending node, the method 400 includes the following steps:
  • the first node sends information about the candidate beams of the first node to the third node.
  • the second node sends information about the candidate beams of the second node to the third node.
  • the first node sends the candidate beam information of the first node to the third node through the first link
  • the second node sends the candidate beam information of the second node to the third node through the second link
  • the third node can pass The information of the candidate beams of the first node is obtained through the first link
  • the information of the candidate beams of the second node is obtained through the second link.
  • the information of the candidate beams may be the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam, or other parameters capable of identifying a specific beam as mentioned above, and may also be the number of candidate beams.
  • the third node determines beam information of the first node and the second node.
  • the beam information of the first node may be the index of the transmitting beam of the first node and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the transmitting beam of the first node or other parameters capable of identifying a specific beam, or it may be the transmitting beam sequence of the first node.
  • the beam information of the second node may be an index of the receiving beam of the second node and/or an angle corresponding to the index of the receiving beam of the second node or other parameters capable of identifying a specific beam, or may be a receiving beam sequence of the second node.
  • the coordinating node may determine the information of the transmitting beam of the first node and the information of the receiving beam of the second node from the candidate beams.
  • the coordinating node may determine the beam sequences of the first node and the second node.
  • the information of the candidate beam may further include the first sub-information and/or the second sub-information.
  • the first sub-information includes the direction of the first link, the distance of the first link, the direction of the second link and the distance of the second link
  • the second sub-information includes the position information of the first node and the position of the second node information
  • the coordinating node may determine the beam information or beam sequence according to the information of the candidate beam and the first sub-information, or determine the beam information or the beam sequence according to the information of the candidate beam and the second sub-information.
  • the information exchanged between the coordination node and the first node and/or the second node includes a lot of information related to the coordinate system such as angles and positions. Therefore, flexible and effective configuration of related information by the coordinating node requires that the coordinating node and the first node and/or the second node have the same understanding of the received information related to the coordinate system.
  • the same condition as understood above can be satisfied, regardless of whether the same coordinate system is GCS or LCS.
  • the third node may also send the first request information to the first node through the first link and/or pass The second link sends second request information to the second node, for requesting information about candidate beams of the two nodes.
  • the third node sends the first request information to the first node.
  • the third node sends the second request information to the second node.
  • the first request information is used to request the information of the candidate beams of the first node; the second request information is used to request the information of the candidate beams of the second node.
  • the first node sends the candidate resource information of the first node to the third node.
  • the second node sends the candidate resource information of the second node to the third node.
  • the candidate resource information may be time-frequency resource information, such as an index of the time-frequency resource, and is used to transmit beams configured by the third node for the first node and the second node.
  • the sending of the candidate resource information may be based on the request of the third node, for example, the third node sends the third request information and the fourth request information to the first node respectively.
  • the third node may also include a request for candidate resource information of the first node and the second node in the first request information and the second request information.
  • the first node and the second node actively report their candidate resource information to the third node, for example, they may periodically report the candidate resource information to the third node.
  • the third node can determine the resources corresponding to the sending or receiving beams of the first node and the second node based on the candidate resource information of the first node and the second node, and the feedback resources of the second node are used for feedback link conditions, such as beam Pairing status, channel quality, etc.
  • the third node sends beam information of the first node to the first node.
  • the third node sends beam information of the second node to the second node.
  • the third node determines the beam information in the above step S440, it can send the beam information of the first node to the first node through the first link, and send the beam information of the second node to the second node through the second link.
  • the first node and the second node can use the received beam information sent by the third node, and use the beam or beam sequence indicated by the corresponding beam information to perform data transmission or further perform beam scanning.
  • the third node sends resource information of the first node to the first node.
  • the third node sends resource information of the second node to the second node.
  • the third node sends the transmission power of the first node to the first node.
  • the resource information of the first node and the second node is the beam corresponding to the communication beam information finally determined by the first node and the second node from the beam information resource.
  • the resource information of the first node and the second node is the resource corresponding to the communication beam pair finally determined after the first node and the second node scan according to the corresponding wave number sequence.
  • the resources of the first node and the second node may be the same time-frequency resources.
  • the first node may also send the antenna gain information of the first node in the first link to the third node through the first link
  • the second node may also send the antenna gain information of the second node in the second link to the third node through the second link.
  • Antenna gain information for the link may also predict the path loss of the third link, determine the transmission power of the first node in combination with the distance between the first node and the second node, and send the transmission power to the first node.
  • the second node sends feedback information to the third node.
  • the content of the information fed back by the second node to the third node may be determined by the third node, including but not limited to beam pairing status, data transmission status, channel quality, and the like.
  • Figure 4 only shows the case where the coordinating node is the third node.
  • the coordinating node is the first node or the second node, take the coordinating node being the first node as an example.
  • the first node only Information about candidate beams and candidate resource information of the second node need to be known.
  • long-period reporting and dynamic micro-update can be adopted, thereby reducing reporting overhead.
  • the first node since there is no direct link between the first node and the second node, the first node needs to relay and forward the information about the second node through the third node to complete the whole process.
  • Fig. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the link between the third node and the second node is the second link, and the third node has the established first link with the first node at the same time.
  • the second node moves to The signal coverage of the first node, the third node can trigger the first The node establishes a link with the second node, so as to improve the fast auxiliary transmission of delay-sensitive service data and improve the reliability.
  • the third node may be a source node and also a coordinating node
  • the second node may be a sink node
  • the first node may be a relay node
  • the link between the source node and the relay node is the first link
  • the link between the source node and the sink node is the second link
  • the link between the relay node and the sink node is the third link of the beam to be established or determined.
  • the source node configures the indexes and/or angles of the transmitting and receiving beams for it by obtaining the indexes of the relay node and the candidate beams of the sink node and/or the corresponding angles of the index of the candidate beams of the sink node, thereby reducing the number of relay nodes.
  • the beam scanning range reduces overhead and delay.
  • the source node determines the distance and direction of the third link.
  • the direction can be the angle between the link and a certain coordinate system, such as the north direction, or the angle between the two links can be determined by the directions of the two links, and then the two links can be combined The distance between the two links, so that the angle between the link to be established or the beam link to be determined and the two links can be determined, so as to further obtain the direction of the link to be established (or the direction of the beam).
  • the source node may acquire the direction of the third link according to the location information of the relay node and the sink node.
  • the location information may be relative coordinates or absolute coordinates, and the direction of the third link can be obtained according to the geometric relationship.
  • the source node triggers beam configuration of the third link.
  • the source node determines to trigger the beam configuration of the third link according to the distance of the third link being less than a preset threshold.
  • the source node requests the sink node for the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam.
  • the source node requests the relay node for the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam.
  • the source node may also request candidate resource information from the sink node and the relay node.
  • the candidate resource information includes available time-frequency resources of the relay node and the sink node, and the like.
  • the index of the candidate beam of the relay node requested by the source node and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam is used for relaying
  • the node sends data to the sink node; and the index of the candidate beam of the sink node and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the sink node are used for the sink node to receive data from the relay node.
  • the source node can only request the candidate beam index and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam in a certain angle range or geographic location range of the sink or relay node, thereby reducing the reporting overhead of the two nodes and its own coordination overhead.
  • S532 and S534 are optional steps, that is, the source node as a cooperative node requests the index of the candidate beam and/or the corresponding angle of the index of the candidate beam.
  • This step does not have to exist, and the relay node and the sink node can periodically send Report the index of the candidate beam and/or the corresponding angle of the index of the candidate beam to reduce the overhead and delay of the source node sending the request message, and the source node can also request the index of the candidate beam and/or The index of the candidate beam corresponds to the angle to reduce the delay.
  • the source node as a coordinating node, can directly perform beam configuration based on the reported beam configuration parameters without the need to report relevant information, reducing delay and improving data transmission efficiency.
  • the sink node feeds back the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam to the source node.
  • the relay node feeds back the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam to the source node.
  • the feedback in this step is respectively the feedback to the requests in S532 and S534.
  • the source node and the sink node send the index of the receiving beam of the sink node and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the receiving beam of the sink node.
  • the source node, the relay node sends the index of the transmit beam of the relay node and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the transmit beam of the relay node.
  • the sink node sends feedback information to the source node.
  • Feedback information can include ACK/NACK feedback for beam pairing to feed back whether beam pairing is successful, and can also include ACK/NACK feedback for data transmission to feedback whether data transmission is successful, and can also include parameter feedback describing channel quality.
  • the source node When there is only one pair of transmitted/received beams configured, the source node can be triggered to reconfigure beams when NACK feedback is received or the signal-to-noise ratio is lower than a certain threshold.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of time delay corresponding to the method shown in FIG. 5 .
  • Fig. 6 further describes the process of the source node acting as the coordinating node assisting the establishment of the third link and performing data transmission through the source-sink link and source-relay-sink link in the scenario shown in Fig. 5 from a chronological order.
  • the source node transmits data and configuration information to the relay node and the sink node at the same time, and the configuration information includes the sending/receiving beam of the third link and its corresponding sending/receiving resources, Transmit power, feedback resources, etc.
  • the source node can know the specific time when data needs to be sent, so that the data has been transmitted according to the first link, the second link state, and the candidate beams of the relay node and the sink node before that.
  • Information and candidate resource information configure the transceiver beam corresponding to the third link and its corresponding time-frequency resources, transmission power, and feedback resources, so that when data transmission is required, the data and configuration information are directly sent to the relay node,
  • the sink node is the time period t0-t1.
  • the sink node receives beam configuration information and data and processes them, including physical layer processing and high-level processing, and the processing time is ⁇ 1 time period. During the ⁇ 1 period of this link, the sink node has determined the receiving beam of the relay node-sink node link according to the configuration of the source node, so that the subsequent relay node-sink node link directly receives data for processing.
  • the relay node receives the beam configuration information and data from the source node for light processing, as shown in the ⁇ 2 time period in the figure.
  • the relay node can forward the data to the destination node.
  • the forwarding method can be decoding forwarding, demodulation forwarding, soft forwarding, or even only amplification forwarding.
  • the forwarding is performed on the corresponding configuration beam.
  • the resource can be configured for the source node, and the choice of forwarding mode can also be configured for the cooperative node.
  • the time period used for the forwarding step is t1+ ⁇ 2-t2.
  • the sink node After the sink node receives the data, it can process the data like the source node-sink node link, including physical layer processing and high-level processing, and the time is also ⁇ 1.
  • the source node assists the fast link between the relay node and the sink node. Established, so that when the data is transmitted to the sink node through the relay node, the delay is small, and the reliable transmission of delay-sensitive data is guaranteed.
  • the delay diagram shown in Figure 6 is the process of determining beam information and performing data transmission for the relay-sink link assisted by the source node.
  • the coordinated nodes are other nodes, the first node and the second node.
  • the coordinating node assists the first node and/or the second node in configuring beam information or other configuration information, It is also possible to achieve a similar delay reduction effect, which can be obtained through analysis in conjunction with other embodiments. For the sake of brevity, details will not be repeated here.
  • Fig. 7 shows a schematic flowchart of another beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first node may be a source node and also a coordinating node
  • the third node is a relay node
  • the second node is a sink node
  • the link between the source node and the relay node is the first link
  • the link between the relay node and the sink node is the second link
  • the link between the source node and the sink node is the third link of the beam to be established or determined.
  • the source node uses GCS
  • the relay node and sink node use LCS3 and LCS2 respectively.
  • the coordinate system used by the three nodes in the embodiment corresponding to method 700 is different, and the process of coordinate system conversion is required, and because there is no direct link between the source node and the sink node, some information of the sink node It needs to be forwarded to the source node through the relay node.
  • the relay node sends the second link beam information to the source node.
  • the relay node dynamically or semi-statically sends the angle corresponding to the index of the transmit beam of the relay node in the second link and the distance of the second link to the source node.
  • the reporting may include long-period distance reporting and dynamic distance micro-updates.
  • the source node determines the distance and direction of the third link.
  • the source node knows the sending beam direction of the source node in the first link, that is, the direction of the first link, it is easy to obtain the distance of the first link, and the direction of the second link can be obtained through the relay node and distance, that is, the direction of the third link (or the direction of the beam) and the distance of the third link can be determined according to the geometric relationship.
  • the source node may also obtain the location information of the sink node through the relay node, so as to obtain the direction and distance of the third link.
  • the source node triggers beam configuration of the third link.
  • the source node determines the trigger beam configuration according to the third distance being smaller than the threshold value.
  • the source node requests the sink node through the relay node for the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam.
  • the step of requesting does not have to exist.
  • the sink node can periodically report the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam to the source node by the relay node.
  • the source node can request the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam to the sink node through the relay node in advance to reduce the delay.
  • the sink node feeds back the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam to the source node through the relay node.
  • the fed back message includes the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam.
  • the source node can only request the index of the candidate beam within a certain angle range and/or the corresponding angle of the index of the candidate beam
  • the sink node will feed back the index and/or the index of the candidate beam corresponding to the angle range according to the request of the source node
  • the index of the candidate beam corresponds to the angle, thereby reducing the reporting overhead of the sink node and the coordination overhead of the source node.
  • the sink node Since both the relay node and the sink node use the local coordinate system, the sink node is about to send the index of the beam under its local coordinate system LCS3 and its corresponding angle set to the source node through the relay node.
  • the source node performs LCS3-GCS coordinate transformation.
  • the source node can keep the index of the beam, convert the angle under LCS3 into the angle under GCS, and then according to the beam angle Beams close to the direction of the third link are selected as several receiving beams of the sink node, and then indexes corresponding to the selected beams are sent to the sink node.
  • the coordinate conversion can be performed by using a tool such as a matrix.
  • the source node also configures itself a transmit beam for communicating with the sink node.
  • the source node sends the index of the beam and/or the corresponding angle of the beam to the sink node through the relay node.
  • Sending the sending or receiving beam configuration information to the sink node may be sending the index of the beam or the angle corresponding to the index under LCS3 to the sink node. That is, the source node can convert the configured beam information under the GCS into beam information under the LCS3, and then send it to the sink node.
  • the source node since the source node has converted the beam information of the sink node under LCS3 into the beam information of the GCS in S770, the source node can be configured according to the distance and direction of the source node-sink node link, The sending/receiving beam of the sink node, after the receiving beam of the sink node is finally determined, only need to send the index of the beam corresponding to the angle to the sink node to complete the beam configuration.
  • the source node may also configure the sequence of sending and receiving beams for the third link according to the beams configured for the sink node and the sending beams used by itself.
  • the source node may also configure time-frequency resources, sending power, and feedback resources corresponding to the sending or receiving beams for the third link.
  • the source node uses the configured transmit power to transmit data on the transmit resource using the transmit beam corresponding to the transmit beam index, and the sink node receives data on the corresponding receive resource using the receive beam corresponding to the receive beam index.
  • the relay node and the sink node can use more than one beam for data transmission, for example, one sending beam corresponds to multiple receiving beams, multiple sending beams correspond to one receiving beam, and multiple sending beams Corresponding to multiple receiving beams, a better beam pairing scheme may also be selected from the configured sending/receiving beams according to a certain standard.
  • the sink node sends feedback information to the source node.
  • the sink node can perform feedback on the newly-built third link on the feedback resource, that is, in the pairing state, the feedback resource can feedback whether the beam pairing is successful, such as feedback ACK/NACK, and feedback the channel quality of the third link in the measurement feedback resource, such as reference Received signal power, signal-to-noise ratio, etc.
  • the feedback can be the feedback for the reference signal.
  • the sink node can separately feed back multiple receiving beams, and the channel can be selected later One or more receive beams with better quality are used for data transmission.
  • the sink node can also directly feed back the data to be transmitted.
  • the source node can be triggered to reconfigure the beams when receiving NACK feedback or the signal-to-noise ratio is lower than a certain threshold.
  • FIG. 7 shows a process in which the source node assists the source-sink link in determining beam information so as to perform data transmission.
  • the coordinate systems used by the collaborating node and the sink node that need to be configured by the collaborating node are different, that is, the collaborating node uses GCS, and when the sink node uses LCS2, the collaborating node uniformly converts the information of the sink node into information under GCS before configuring , and send the beam information converted back to LCS2 to the sink node.
  • the source node may also convert its own coordinate system into the coordinate system of LCS2 and then configure the beam information, so as to directly send the beam information under LCS2 to the sink node.
  • LCS is used for the source node.
  • the sink node can also configure beam information or other information according to a similar coordinate transformation process using the GCS.
  • similar scenarios can also be performed for the scenes shown in Figure 5, Figure 6, Figure 8, Figure 10, Figure 12, etc. Coordinate transformation of the beam information or other information configuration.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of another beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method 800 according to another specific embodiment of the present application.
  • the third node is a relay node and also a coordination node
  • the first node is a source node
  • the second node is a sink node
  • the link between the source node and the relay node is the first link
  • the relay node The link between the node and the sink node is the second link
  • the link between the source node and the sink node is the third link to be established.
  • the coordinating node obtains the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam, and configures the index of the sending or receiving beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the sending or receiving beam.
  • the coordinating node obtains the candidate beam The number of beams, so as to configure the sending or receiving beam sequence to reduce beam scanning overhead and delay
  • the relay node acquires the first location information of the source node and the second location information of the sink node.
  • the relay node acquires the location information of the source node and the sink node may be determined according to the established link information between the relay node and the two nodes.
  • the position information can be expressed in the form of coordinates, which can be absolute position information or relative position information.
  • the implementation of method 800 can establish a gridded coordinate system within the area where the system composed of three nodes is located.
  • the coordinate system can be established based on the global coordinate system, or can be a common
  • the local coordinate system used is established. Compared with using the absolute position, using the relative position of the area grid can only quantify the area within the range of the grid, which reduces the overhead of nodes storing relevant information and sending messages.
  • the relay node sends the first location information to the sink node, and sends the second location information to the source node.
  • the sink node determines a candidate receiving beam used by the sink node for the third link.
  • the source node determines a candidate transmission beam used by the source node for the third link.
  • the source node can determine the direction of the third link according to its own location information and the location information of the sink node, thereby determining several candidate beams.
  • the sink node can determine the direction of the third link according to its own location information and the location information of the source node, thereby determining several candidate beams.
  • the sink node sends the number of candidate beams of the sink node to the relay node.
  • the source node sends the number of candidate beams of the source node to the relay node.
  • the number of candidate beams can be sent according to the request of the relay node, the source node and the sink node can send the determined number of candidate beams to the relay node, and the number of candidate beams of the source node
  • the number is determined by the source node according to the positions of itself and the sink node; the information about the number of candidate wave numbers of the sink node is determined by the node according to the position of itself and the source node.
  • the relay node may also configure other information for the source node and the sink node, which may include the source node's transmission resources and transmission power, the sink node's reception resources, feedback resources, and feedback content.
  • the relay node sends the receiving beam sequence of the sink node to the sink node.
  • the relay node sends the transmission beam sequence of the source node to the source node.
  • the relay node may also configure the above-mentioned other information for the two nodes of the third link and send it to the two nodes.
  • the relay node may configure sending and receiving beam sequences for the source node and the sink node according to the number of candidate beams of the source node and the sink node. Therefore, the source node and the sink node can poll each other for beams, and by traversing beam combinations, a beam pair with higher transmission quality can be selected.
  • the sink node sends feedback information to the relay node.
  • the relay node If the relay node receives the feedback NACK, it can trigger the source node and the sink node to reconfigure the sending/receiving beam, and the relay node reconfigures other related resources.
  • the third link node itself determines the corresponding candidate beam, and the coordinating node can configure others such as transmission power, transceiving resources and feedback resources. In fact, other configurations such as transmission power, sending and receiving resources, and feedback resources can also be configured by the third link node itself. In this way, the coordinating node can only assist the process of information transmission between the source node and the sink node. Interaction of source node and sink node candidate resource information and other information.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of time delay corresponding to the method shown in FIG. 8 .
  • FIG. 9 further describes the process in which the relay node, as a coordinating node, assists in the establishment of the source-sink link and performs data transmission through the source-sink and source-relay-sink links from a chronological order.
  • the source node For the source-relay-sink link, during the time period t0-t1, the source node sends control signaling and data to the relay node. Prior to this, the coordinating node relay node has determined the sending/receiving beam sequence of the source node-sink node link according to the interaction with the source node and the sink node.
  • the sink node receives the configuration information from the relay node.
  • the relay node sends data to the sink node.
  • the sink node receives the data sent by the relay node, the data is received by the relay node from the source node, and can receive the data based on the configuration information of the relay node received by the sink node in the ⁇ 2 time period.
  • ⁇ 1 time period the processing time for the sink node to receive data, including physical layer processing and high layer processing time.
  • the source node receives the configuration information from the relay node.
  • the relay node may send configuration information to the sink and the source node on different time-frequency resources for the source-sink link.
  • the source node-sink node link since the relay node has configured relevant information for the link in the time period ⁇ 2 and ⁇ 3, after the end of ⁇ 3, that is, in the time period t1+ ⁇ 2+ ⁇ 3-t3, the source node sends The sink node sends data, and then in the ⁇ 1 time period, the sink node processes the information directly received from the source node.
  • Fig. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the second node is a coordinating node and also a sink node
  • the third node is a source node (not shown in the figure)
  • the first node is a relay node
  • the link between the source node and the relay node is The first link
  • the link between the source node and the sink node is the second link
  • the technical solution of method 1000 The coordinating node determines the index and/or angle of the transmitting and receiving beams of the relay node and the coordinating node itself through the position information of the relay node.
  • the sink node obtains the location information of the relay node.
  • the location information may be coordinates, or a geographic location range such as a coordinate range.
  • the location information of the relay node can be sent to the sink node through the source node, and after obtaining the location information of the relay node, the sink node can combine the location information of the sink node itself to determine the distance and direction of the third link. If the link distance is less than a certain threshold, the establishment of the third link may be triggered.
  • the sink node requests the relay node for the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam through the source node.
  • the relay node may also periodically feed back the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam to the sink node through the source node.
  • the relay node feeds back the index of the candidate beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam to the sink node through the source node.
  • the feedback information is the feedback for the information requested in S1020.
  • the sink node sends the index of the sending beam of the relay node and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the sending beam to the relay node through the source node.
  • the sink node configures the index of the receiving beam and/or the angle corresponding to the index of the receiving beam for itself, and other information may also be configured, which may include the transmission power of the relay node, time-frequency resources, time-frequency resources of the sink node, feedback resources and content.
  • the sink node can also trigger beam reconfiguration when the channel quality is too poor or the beam pairing fails according to the beam pairing situation and channel quality measurement.
  • the present application also provides another technical solution to achieve the technical effect of the present application.
  • the technical solution will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 11 to 12 .
  • FIG. 11 shows a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 1100 shown in FIG. 11 may include steps S1110 and S1120, and each step will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • the first node acquires location information of the second node.
  • the location information of the second node can be obtained through other nodes, such as the first node through the third node, where the third node and the first node
  • the link between the nodes is the first link
  • the link between the third node and the second node is the second link.
  • the first node obtains the location information of the second node from the third node through the first link
  • the third node obtains the location information of the second node according to the parameters of the second link with the second node, such as sending beam and link
  • the distance can determine the location information of the second node. The method of determining the link distance has been given above, and will not be repeated here.
  • the first node obtains the location information from the second node through the first link and the second link, that is, the second node sends its own location information to the first node through the third node.
  • the first node can obtain its own location information.
  • the position information of the first node and the second node can be the coordinates of the first node and the second node, can be absolute coordinates, can also be relative coordinates, can be coordinates under the global coordinate system (global coordinate system, GCS), or It can be the coordinates in the local coordinate system (local coordinate system, LCS).
  • GCS global coordinate system
  • LCS local coordinate system
  • the location information may be a specific coordinate location, such as longitude and latitude coordinates.
  • the location information may be a geographic location range, such as a coordinate range.
  • the second node or the third node may actively send the location information of the second node to the first node.
  • the second node may actively send the location information to the first node through the second link and the first link according to the requirement of establishing a link with the first node.
  • the third node can learn that the first node and the second node need to establish a link, actively determine the location information of the second node according to the information of the second link, and send it to the first node.
  • the first node or the third node may also send request information to the second node or the third node, for requesting location information of the second node.
  • the first node needs to determine the location information of the second node, so the third node sends request information to the second node to request the location information of the second node.
  • the first node needs to determine the location information of the second node, and directly sends a request message to the third node, requesting the location information of the second node, so that the third node can use the second link between itself and the second node information, determine the location information of the second node, and then send it to the first node through the first link.
  • the third node can know that the first node needs the location information of the second node, for example, the third node is the sender of data, and sends data to the first node and the second node through the first link and the second link , it can also know that the first node and the second node need to establish a link, so that the request information is sent to the second node in advance to request the location information of the second node.
  • the third node knows that the first node needs the location information of the second node, so it directly determines the location information of the second node according to the link information between itself and the second node, and sends it to the first node.
  • the first node further forwards the location information of the first node to the second node through the third node, and the location information of the first node is used by the second node to determine the beam information of the second node.
  • the first node actively forwards the location information of the first node to the second node through the third node.
  • the first node actively sends its location information to the second node, so that the overhead of signaling interaction between the second node and the first node can be reduced.
  • the third node may determine the location information of the first node according to the information of the first link, and send the location information of the first node to the second node.
  • the first node receives the request information sent by the third node, which is used to instruct the first node to report the coordinates corresponding to the first geographic location range.
  • the first node receives the request information sent by the second node forwarded by the third node, which is used to instruct the first node to report the coordinates corresponding to the first geographical range.
  • the first node reports the coordinates corresponding to the first geographical location range, and can report its own location information to the second node in time when it needs to establish a link with the second node, so that the second node can configure according to the location information
  • the beam information of the second node reduces the beam scanning range of the second node, and reduces delay and overhead.
  • the first node determines beam information of the first node according to the location information of the first node, the location information of the second node, and the information of candidate beams of the first node.
  • the information of the candidate beam of the first node may be an index of the candidate beam of the first node and/or an angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node.
  • the information of the candidate beam of the first node may also include the beam number, the beam management resource number, the uplink signal resource number, the downlink signal resource number, the sidelink signal resource number, the absolute index of the beam, the relative index of the beam, the beam
  • the information of the candidate beams of the first node includes information related to at least one of an angle range and a geographical range.
  • the information of the candidate beams of the first node may include information of all beams of the first node.
  • the angle range is not limited or the angle range is 360°, so that the information of the candidate beams of the first node or the second node includes the information of all the beams of the first node or the second node or a subset of the maximum number of beams corresponding to the configuration .
  • the information about the candidate beams of the first node may include information about some beams of the first node.
  • the information on the candidate beams of the first node includes information on beams in a certain angle range or geographic location range.
  • the above-mentioned angle may be, for example, a beam in the range of 0-180°.
  • the geographic location can also correspond to the angle.
  • the coordinates or position range of the second node is in the north direction of the first node. When the first node communicates with the second node, you can only select 90° west by north and 90° east by north Beams within a total angle range of 180° are used as candidate beams.
  • the first node may send candidate resource information of the first node to the third node, and the candidate resource information of the first node is used by the third node to determine the The time-frequency resource of the transmitting or receiving beam and/or the feedback resource of the first node, wherein the feedback resource is used to feed back to the third node the beam pairing status on the third link, the first node At least one of the data transmission status on the three links or the channel quality of the third link.
  • the third node receives the candidate resource information sent by the first node, so as to determine the time-frequency resource of the sending or receiving beam of the first node according to the information of the candidate resource of the first node, if the first node is the third link
  • the receiving node may also determine the feedback resource of the first node.
  • the first node is a sending node when the first node establishes communication with the second node, and the candidate resource information of the first node is used by the third node to determine the time-frequency resource of the sending beam of the first node.
  • the first node is the receiving node when the first node establishes communication with the second node
  • the candidate resource information of the first node is used by the third node to determine the time-frequency resource and/or the receiving beam of the first node Or the feedback resource of the first node.
  • the third node may also determine the feedback content of the first node, the feedback content includes the beam pairing situation between the first node and the second node, the data transmission status on the third link, and the channel quality of the third link at least one.
  • the third node configures the time-frequency resources and/or feedback resources of the transmitting and receiving beams for the first node, which can cope with duplex matching and avoid resource conflicts.
  • the first node if the first node is the sending node between the first node and the second node, the first node also sends the antenna gain of the first node on the first link to the third node information, the antenna gain information is used by the third node to determine the transmit power of the first node on the third link.
  • the third node receives the antenna gain information of the first node on the first link, and the antenna gain information is used by the third node to determine the transmit power of the first node on the third link.
  • the third node may also determine the transmission of the sending node on the third link according to the path loss information on the third link predicted by the third node and the antenna gain information of the second node on the second link sent by the second node. power.
  • the third node can flexibly determine the transmission power according to the information of the third link, so as to avoid affecting other link communications when the power is too high, and gradually increase the power that affects communication quality when the power is too small.
  • the third node may send the transmit power information to the first node, instructing the first node to communicate with the corresponding power.
  • the above scheme of configuring beam information for the first node and/or the second node subset can also enable the first node and/or the second node to perform beam scanning in a smaller range, saving its scanning overhead and reducing time delay and energy consumption.
  • the third node may be any one of a source node, a relay node, and a sink node.
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic flowchart of a beam configuration method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the third node is a source node and also a coordinating node
  • the first node is a relay node
  • the second node is a sink node
  • the link between the relay node and the source node is the first link
  • the source node The link between the node and the sink node is the second link
  • the link between the sink node and the relay node is the third link of the beam to be established or determined.
  • the source node acquires the location information of the relay node and the sink node.
  • the source node can either directly determine the location information of the relay node based on the information of the first link (link direction, link distance) between the source node and the relay node, or send The node sends a request message, requesting the location information of the relay node.
  • the manner in which the source node obtains the location information of the sink node is similar to the manner in which the relay node obtains the location information, and will not be repeated here.
  • the location information of the relay node and the sink node may be expressed in the form of coordinates or a geographic location range or a coordinate location range identifier, and may be absolute location information or relative location information.
  • the source node sends the location information of the relay node to the sink node.
  • the source node sends the location information of the sink node to the relay node.
  • the relay node may further process the location information to obtain link directions and configure corresponding sending/receiving beams.
  • the sink node determines its own beam information.
  • the relay node determines its own beam information.
  • the beam information of the sink node and the relay node is determined according to the location information of the sink node and the relay node.
  • the sink node determines its own receiving beam information according to its own location information, the relay node's location information, and its own candidate beam information.
  • the relay node determines its own transmission beam information according to its own location information, the location information of the sink node, and its own candidate beam information.
  • the beam information may be a beam angle and/or a beam index, and the beam information is used to indicate a corresponding beam.
  • the sink node sends feedback information to the source node.
  • the source node may also configure the time-frequency resource and transmit power corresponding to the transmit beam for the relay node, and configure the time-frequency resource, feedback resource, and feedback content corresponding to the receive beam for the sink node.
  • the source node If the source node receives a feedback NACK, it can trigger the source node to reconfigure the sending/receiving beam, and the source node reconfigures other related resources.
  • Fig. 13 shows a schematic block diagram of an apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device in FIG. 13 is used to realize the technical solution corresponding to FIG. 2 to FIG. 10 .
  • the device 1300 is applied in a communication system, the communication system includes a first node, a second node and a third node, the device is a coordination node, and the coordination node is the first node, the second node and the For any node in the third node, the device includes:
  • a transceiver unit 1310 configured to acquire first information, where the first information includes information about candidate beams of the first node and information about candidate beams of the second node;
  • a processing unit 1320 configured to determine beam information of the first node and beam information of the second node according to the first information, where the beam information of the first node is used to indicate that the first node The transmitting beam of the second node, the beam information of the second node is used to indicate the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the transceiving unit 1310 is specifically configured to acquire the first information in at least one of the following ways: receiving information of candidate beams of the first node reported by the first node; or receiving the first information The information of the candidate beams of the second node reported by the two nodes.
  • the transceiving unit 1310 is further configured to perform at least one of the following operations: sending first request information to the first node, where the first request information is used to instruct the first node to report the first Information about candidate beams of a node; or, sending second request information to the second node, where the second request information is used to instruct the second node to report information about candidate beams of the second node.
  • the information about the candidate beams includes information related to at least one of an angle range and a geographic range.
  • the information of the candidate beam of the first node includes the index of the candidate beam of the first node, the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node, and the number of the candidate beam of the first node
  • the information of the candidate beam of the second node includes the index of the candidate beam of the second node, the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the second node, and the angle of the candidate beam of the second node at least one of the numbers.
  • the number of candidate beams is determined according to the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node.
  • the beam information of the first node includes a transmit beam sequence of the first node; the beam information of the second node includes a receive beam sequence of the second node.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to, according to at least one of the index of the candidate beam of the first node and the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node, determine the At least one of the index of the sending beam and the angle corresponding to the index of the sending beam of the first node; according to at least one of the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the second node and the index of the candidate beam of the second node One item, determining at least one item of an index of the receiving beam of the second node and an angle corresponding to the index of the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the first information further includes at least one of first sub-information and second sub-information
  • the first sub-information includes the direction of the first link, the distance of the first link , the direction of the second link and the distance of the second link
  • the second sub-information includes the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node
  • the processing unit 1320 specifically It is configured to: determine the beam information of the first node according to at least one of the first sub-information and the second sub-information and the information of the candidate beam of the first node; according to the first sub-information information, at least one item of the second sub-information, and information about candidate beams of the second node, to determine beam information of the second node.
  • the first sub-information and the second sub-information determine the distance between the first node and the second node; when the first node and the second When the distance between two nodes is less than a preset threshold, determine the beam information of the first node and the beam information of the second node.
  • the transceiving unit 1310 is further configured to obtain second information, where the second information includes candidate resource information of the first node and candidate resource information of the second node; the processing unit 1320, It is also used to determine the sending resource information of the first node and the receiving resource information of the second node according to the second information, and the sending resource information of the first node is used to indicate the sending resource information of the first node Beam resources, where the receiving resource information of the second node is used to indicate the receiving beam resources of the second node.
  • the transceiving unit 1310 is further configured to: send the first node's transmission resource information to the first node; send the second node's reception resource information to the second node; wherein, the The sending resource information of the first node is used to indicate the resource of the sending beam of the first node, and the receiving resource information of the second node is used to indicate the resource of the receiving beam of the second node.
  • the transceiving unit 1310 is further configured to obtain third information, where the third information includes distance information between the first node and the second node, distance information between the first node and the first node At least one of antenna gain information of the link, antenna gain information of the second node on the second link, and path loss information of the third link predicted by the coordinating node, wherein the third link A path is a link used for communication between the first node and the second node; the processing unit 1320 is further configured to determine the transmission power of the first node according to the third information.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send transmission power information of the first node to the first node, and the first node
  • the sending power information of a node is used to indicate the sending power of the first node.
  • the processing unit 1320 is further configured to determine feedback resource information of the second node, where the feedback resource information of the second node is used to indicate the feedback resource of the second node, wherein the feedback resource It is used to feed back the beam pairing state between the first node and the second node, the data transmission state between the first node and the second node, and the At least one item of channel quality between the second nodes.
  • the coordinating node is the third node
  • the transceiving unit 1310 is specifically configured to: directly obtain the information of the candidate beams of the first node from the first node; directly obtain the information of the first node from the second node.
  • the transceiving unit 1310 is further configured to perform at least one of the following operations: sending first indication information to the first node, where the first indication information includes beam information of the first node; or , sending second indication information to the second node, where the second indication information includes beam information of the second node.
  • Fig. 14 shows a schematic block diagram of an apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device in FIG. 14 is used to realize the technical solution corresponding to FIG. 2 to FIG. 10 .
  • the device 1400 is applied in a communication system, the communication system includes a first node, a second node and a third node, the coordinating node is the third node or the second node, and the device is the first node , the device includes:
  • the transceiver unit 1410 is used for:
  • the beam information of the first node is used to indicate a sending beam or a receiving beam of the first node.
  • the transceiving unit 1410 is further configured to: receive first request information sent by the coordination node, where the first request information is used to instruct the first node to report the information of the candidate beam of the first node information.
  • the information about the candidate beams of the first node includes information related to at least one of an angle range and a geographical range.
  • the information of the candidate beam of the first node includes the index of the candidate beam of the first node, the angle corresponding to the index of the candidate beam of the first node, and the number of the candidate beam of the first node At least one of the .
  • the number of candidate beams of the first node is determined according to the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node.
  • the location information of the second node is received from the coordination node.
  • the beam information of the first node includes at least one of an index of the beam of the first node and an angle corresponding to the index of the beam of the first node; or, the beam information of the first node A beam sequence comprising the first node.
  • the beam information of the first node is determined according to at least one of the first sub-information and the second sub-information and the information of the candidate beam of the first node; wherein the first sub-information Including the direction of the first link, the distance of the first link, the direction of the second link and the distance of the second link, the second sub-information includes the location information and location information of the second node; the first link is a link between the first node and the third node, and the second link is a link between the second node and the link between the third nodes.
  • the transceiving unit 1410 is further configured to send candidate resource information of the first node to the coordinating node, and the candidate resource information of the first node is used by the coordinating node to determine the transmission of the first node.
  • At least one of the time-frequency resource of the beam or the receiving beam and the feedback resource of the first node, wherein the feedback resource is used to feed back the beam between the first node and the second node to the cooperative node At least one of a pairing state, a data transmission state between the first node and the second node, and a channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • the transceiving unit 1410 is further configured to receive resource information of a first node from the coordinating node, where the resource information of the first node includes resources of a transmitting beam or a receiving beam of the first node and At least one of the feedback resources of the first node, wherein the feedback resources are used to feed back the beam pairing status between the first node and the second node, the beam pairing status between the first node and the second node, and the At least one of a data transmission state between the second nodes and a channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • the transceiving unit 1410 is further configured to send antenna gain information of the first node on the first link to the coordinating node, and the antenna gain information is used by the coordinating node to determine the The transmission power of the first node on the third link; wherein the third link is a link used for communication between the first node and the second node.
  • the first node is a sending node between the first node and the second node
  • the transceiving unit 1410 is further configured to receive the sending from the first node of the coordination node Power information, where the transmission power information of the first node is used to indicate the transmission power of the first node.
  • the coordinating node is the third node, and the transceiving unit 1410 is specifically configured to: directly send the information of the candidate beam of the first node to the coordinating node through the first node; or , the coordinating node is the second node, and the transceiving unit 1410 is specifically configured to: indirectly send the information of the candidate beam of the first node to the coordinating node through the three nodes.
  • Fig. 15 shows a schematic block diagram of an apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device in FIG. 15 is used to implement the technical solutions corresponding to FIGS. 11 to 12 .
  • the device is the first node, and the device includes:
  • a transceiver unit 1510 configured to acquire location information of the second node
  • the processing unit 1520 is configured to determine the beam information of the first node according to the location information of the first node, the location information of the second node, and the candidate beam information of the first node, and the first node
  • the beam information of the node is used to indicate the sending or receiving beam of the first node.
  • the first node determines the beam information of the first node itself according to the position information of the first node and the obtained position information of the second node, thereby avoiding , scan the full range of beams, reduce the beam scanning range, reduce overhead and delay.
  • the processing unit 1520 is specifically configured to determine the direction of the third link according to the location information of the first node and the location information of the second node; information of the candidate beam of the first node and the direction of the third link, and determine the information of the candidate beam of the first node, wherein the third link is the connection between the first node and the second node link for communication.
  • the device can determine the direction of the third link according to the position information of the first node and the position information of the second node, and then select a beam close to the direction among the beams of the first node according to the direction of the third link as a candidate beam , reducing the beam scanning range, reducing overhead and delay.
  • the information about the candidate beams of the first node includes information related to at least one of an angle range and a geographical range.
  • the fact that the candidate beam information includes information related to at least one of the angle range and geographic location range means that the first node determines all or part of the beam information as the candidate beam information according to the positions of the second node and the first node.
  • the first node may further determine its beam information in the part of the beam information, so as to reduce the beam scanning range and reduce overhead and delay.
  • the transceiving unit 1510 is specifically configured to obtain, by the device, the location information of the second node through a third node.
  • the first node Since there is no direct link between the first node and the second node, the first node needs to pass through the third node to obtain the location information of the second node, and the third node assists in the information transmission between the first node and the second node, which is convenient for the second node
  • a node determines beam information for communication between itself and a second node, thereby reducing scanning overhead and time delay.
  • the transceiving unit 1510 is further configured to forward the location information of the first node to the second node through the third node, and the location information of the first node is used for the second node.
  • a node determines beam information for the second node.
  • the first node also forwards the location information of the first node to the second node through the third node, so that the second node can also determine its own beam information according to the location information of the first node, reducing the time when the second node communicates with the first node
  • the range of beam scanning reduces delay and overhead.
  • the transceiving unit 1510 is configured to receive first request information sent by the third node, where the first request information is used to instruct the first node to report the coordinates corresponding to the first geographic range.
  • the first node can send the coordinates corresponding to the first geographical range to the second node through the third node, so that when the first node and the second node need to communicate, the first node should report the information corresponding to the first geographical range in time. coordinates, the second node determines its own beam information in time based on this, reducing the beam scanning range, reducing delay and overhead.
  • the location information of the second node includes location coordinates of the second node and/or a geographic location range of the second node.
  • the information angle range of the candidate beam that the first node can determine is relatively small, and the first node can perform beam scanning within a smaller range;
  • the overhead required by the second node to report the geographic location range is small, thereby reducing the overhead of the second node.
  • the first node performs beam scanning according to the geographic location range of the second node, The scanning overhead and delay of the first node are reduced.
  • the transceiving unit 1510 is further configured to send candidate resource information of the first node to the third node, where the candidate resource information of the first node is used by the third node to determine the A time-frequency resource of a sending or receiving beam of a node and/or a feedback resource of the first node, wherein the feedback resource is used to feed back a beam between the first node and the second node to the third node At least one of the beam pairing state of the beam, the data transmission state between the first node and the second node, or the channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • the third node may configure the time-frequency resources corresponding to the communication beams for the first node and the second node by using the time-frequency resources of the first node in combination with the time-frequency resources of the second node, so as to cope with duplex matching and reduce resource conflicts.
  • the transceiving unit 1510 is further configured to receive resource information of a first node from the third node, where the resource information of the first node is used to indicate the sending or receiving beam of the first node. resource and/or the feedback resource of the first node, wherein the feedback resource is used to feed back to the third node the beam pairing state of the beam between the first node and the second node, and the first node At least one of a data transmission status with the second node or a channel quality between the first node and the second node.
  • the third node can also configure feedback resources for the receiving node among the first node and the second node, and feed back the beam pairing status, data transmission status and channel quality, so as to trigger timely re-determination when data transmission fails or the channel quality is too poor Beam information reduces the delay of information transmission and increases the reliability of data transmission.
  • the first node is a sending node between the first node and the second node
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to send the first node to the third node in the Antenna gain information of the first link, where the antenna gain information is used by the third node to determine the transmit power of the first node.
  • the first node is a sending node between the first node and the second node
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to receive sending power from the first node of the third node.
  • the third node determines the transmission power of the first node when the first node communicates with the second node to ensure an appropriate transmission power and avoid affecting other links when the power is high.
  • the power is low, the channel quality is not high and the transmission power needs to be increased.
  • Fig. 16 shows a schematic block diagram of an apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 1600 shown in FIG. 16 may correspond to the devices described above. Specifically, the device 1600 may be a specific example of any node in FIG. 1 .
  • the apparatus 1600 includes: a processor 1620 .
  • the processor 1620 is used to implement corresponding control and management operations.
  • the processor 1620 is used to support the device to execute The method or operation or function shown in FIG. 12 .
  • the apparatus 1600 may further include: a memory 1610 and a communication interface 1630 ; the processor 1620 , the communication interface 1630 , and the memory 1610 may be connected to each other or through a bus 1640 .
  • the communication interface 1630 is used to support the device to communicate, and the memory 1610 is used to store program codes and data of the device.
  • the processor 1620 invokes codes or data stored in the memory 1610 to implement corresponding operations.
  • the memory 1610 may or may not be coupled with the processor.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the processor 1620 may be a central processing unit, a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various illustrative logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the present disclosure.
  • the processor may also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, and the like.
  • Communication interface 1630 may be a transceiver, circuit, bus, module, or other type of communication interface.
  • the bus 1640 may be a peripheral component interconnect standard (peripheral component interconnect, PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (extended industry standard architecture, EISA) bus, etc.
  • PCI peripheral component interconnect
  • EISA extended industry standard architecture
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 16 , but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 1700 .
  • the communication device 1700 includes a logic circuit 1710 and an input/output interface (input/output interface) 1720 .
  • the logic circuit 1710 may be a processing circuit in the communication device 1700 .
  • the logic circuit 1710 may be coupled to the storage unit, and invoke instructions in the storage unit, so that the communication device 1700 can implement the methods and functions of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the input/output interface 1720 may be an input/output circuit in the communication device 1700, which outputs information processed by the communication device 1700, or inputs data or signaling information to be processed into the communication device 1700 for processing.
  • the communication device 1700 is configured to implement the operations performed by the coordinating node in the above method embodiments.
  • the logic circuit 1710 is used to implement the processing-related operations performed by the coordination node in the above method embodiments, such as the embodiments shown in Figure 2, Figure 4, Figure 5, Figure 7 to Figure 8, Figure 10, and Figure 12
  • the processing-related operations performed by the coordination node in the above method embodiment the input/output interface 1720 is used to implement the acquisition and/or sending and/or receiving related operations performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment, as shown in Figure 3
  • the sending and/or receiving related operations performed by the terminal device in the example For the operations performed by the logic circuit 1710, refer to the description of the processing unit 1320 above, and for the operations performed by the input/output interface 1720, refer to the description of the transceiver unit 1310 above, and details are not repeated here.
  • the communication device 1700 is configured to implement the operations performed by the first node and/or the second node in each of the above method embodiments.
  • the logic circuit 1710 is used to implement the processing-related operations performed by the first node and/or the second node in the above method embodiments, such as, FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 7 to FIG. 8 , and FIG. 10 , the processing-related operations performed by the first node and/or the second node in the embodiments shown in FIG. 11 and FIG.
  • the operations related to sending and/or receiving performed by the two nodes are, for example, the operations related to sending and/or receiving performed by the first node and/or the second node in the embodiment shown in FIG. 12 .
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores computer-executable instructions, and when the computer-executable instructions are run on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in Fig. 2, Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 7 to Corresponding processes of each method in FIG. 8 , FIG. 10 to FIG. 12 .
  • the present application also provides a device, including at least one processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, and the memory is used to store instructions, so as to realize the above-mentioned Fig. 2, Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 7 to Fig. 8, Fig. 10 to the corresponding flow of each method in FIG. 12 .
  • the device further includes a memory, and the memory and the processor may be deployed separately or in a centralized manner.
  • the device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
  • the present application also provides a device, the device includes at least one logic circuit and an input/output interface, the logic circuit is used to couple with the input/output interface, and transmit data through the input/output interface, so as to execute the , Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 7 to Fig. 8, Fig. 10 to Fig. 12 in the corresponding process of each method.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, including: computer program code, when the computer program code is executed, the computer executes the computer program shown in Fig. 2, Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 7 to Fig. 8, Fig. 10 to Fig. The corresponding flow of each method in FIG. 12 .
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components can be combined or integrated. to another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • a unit described as a separate component may or may not be physically separated, and a component displayed as a unit may or may not be a physical unit, that is, it may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions are realized in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disc and other media that can store program codes. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请实施例提供了一种波束配置方法、装置和系统。该方法应用于通信系统中，通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，协作节点是第一节点、第二节点和第三节点中的任一节点，该方法包括：协作节点获取第一信息，第一信息包括第一节点的候选波束的信息和第二节点的候选波束的信息；协作节点根据第一信息，确定第一节点的波束信息和第二节点的波束信息，第一节点的波束信息用于指示第一节点的发送波束，第二节点的波束信息用于指示第二节点的接收波束。上述技术方案能够降低波束扫描过程中的时延和能耗。

Description

波束配置方法、装置和系统
本申请要求于2021年12月02日提交中国专利局、申请号为202111467660.7、申请名称为“波束配置方法、装置和系统”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请实施例涉及通信领域。更具体地，涉及一种波束配置方法、装置和系统。
背景技术
无线信号在空间传播过程中存在路径损耗(path loss)，会降低信号覆盖范围。为了实现更好的覆盖，引入了波束赋形技术，即通过调整天线阵列中每个阵元的加权系数产生具有指向性的波束。波束具有方向性，能够有效对抗路径损耗。
在两个设备使用波束进行通信之前，首先要进行同步。该两个设备中的每个设备需要进行周期性波束扫描以供其他设备发现或建立连接，其中在每个扫描周期内，都需要使用全波束范围内的各个波束分别发送或接收同步信号。
这种方式下，设备需要进行全波束范围内的扫描，时延大，能耗高，无法满足快速接入需求。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种波束配置方法、装置和系统，能够降低波束扫描过程中的时延和能耗。
第一方面，提供了一种波束配置方法，应用于通信系统中，所述通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，协作节点是所述第一节点、所述第二节点和所述第三节点中的任一节点，所述方法包括：所述协作节点获取第一信息，所述第一信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的信息和所述第二节点的候选波束的信息；所述协作节点根据所述第一信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所述第二节点的波束信息，其中，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束，所述第二节点的波束信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束。
本申请提供的技术方案中，协作节点通过获取第一节点和第二节点的候选波束的信息，辅助确定第一节点和第二节点通信的波束信息，第一节点和第二节点根据协作节点配置的波束信息进行波束扫描和对齐，降低时延和能耗。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述协作节点获取第一信息，包括：所述协作节点通过以下至少一种方式获取所述第一信息：所述协作节点接收所述第一节点上报的所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，所述协作节点接收所述第二节点上报的所述第二节点的候选波束的信息。
若协作节点为第三节点，协作节点接收第一节点和第二节点上报的候选波束的信息；若协作节点是第一节点，协作节点接收第二节点的候选波束的信息；若协作节点是第二节点，协作节点接收第一节点的候选波束的信息。
第一节点和/或第二节点上报各自的候选波束的信息，从而协作节点能够接收该信息并确定两个节点的波束信息。上报可以为周期性主动上报，从而减少协作节点发送信息指示上报的开销和时延，提高两个节点的通信效率。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述协作节点获取第一信息之前，还包括：所述协作节点执行以下至少一项操作：所述协作节点向所述第一节点发送第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，所述协作节点向所述第二节点发送第二请求信息，所述第二请求信息用于指示所述第二节点上报所述第二节点的候选波束的信息。
协作节点通过向第一节点和/或第二节点发送请求信息以请求第一节点和/或第二节点的候选波束的信息，从而能够及时获取相关信息。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中至少一项相关的信息。
候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理位置范围中至少一项相关的信息意味着第一节点和/或第二节点可以上报全部波束信息，也可以仅上报部分波束信息，上述部分波束信息可以是由第一节点和/或第二节点自己确定仅上报该部分波束信息，也可以是由协作节点仅请求第一节点和/或第二节点上报部分波束信息，从而能够节约上报开销，也能使得协作节点在更小的范围内确定第一节点和第二节点的波束信息，减少协作节点的协调开销。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的索引、所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项；所述第二节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第二节点的候选波束的索引、所述第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第二节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
协作节点获取的候选波束的信息为候选波束的索引和/或所述候选波束的索引对应角度，或者候选波束的信息为候选波束的个数，协作节点能够灵活地根据各自不同的候选波束的信息，为第一节点和第二节点配置相应的波束信息。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选波束的个数是根据所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息确定的。
第一节点或第二节点可以根据第一节点和第二节点的位置信息确定第三链路的方向，从而选出对应该方向的数个波束作为候选波束，即可以确定候选波束的个数。根据位置信息确定候选波束的个数可以避免选择过大范围的波束，减小波束扫描开销。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述协作节点执行以下至少一项操作：将所述第二节点的位置信息发送给所述第一节点；或者，将所述第一节点的位置信息发送给所述第二节点。
协作节点将一个节点的位置信息发送给链路对侧或目标节点，从而两个节点能够根据自己的位置信息和对侧节点的位置信息确定自己的候选波束，便于协作节点进一步配置波 束序列。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的发送波束序列；所述第二节点的波束信息包括所述第二节点的接收波束序列。
协作节点能够根据候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度确定第一节点的发送波束序列和第二节点的接收波束序列；协作节点能够跟据候选波束的个数确定第一节点的发送波束序列和第二节点的接收波束序列。从而第一节点和第二节点可以依据相应的波束序列进行波束扫描和对齐，快速匹配最优波束，降低波束扫描开销和时延。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述协作节点根据所述第一信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所述第二节点的波束信息，包括：所述协作节点根据所述第一节点的候选波束的索引和所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项，确定所述第一节点的发送波束的索引和所述第一节点的发送波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；所述协作节点根据所述第二节点的候选波束的索引和所述第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项，确定所述第二节点的接收波束的索引和所述第二节点的接收波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项。
协作节点能够根据候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度，确定第一节点和第二节点的波束的索引和/或第一节点和第二节点的波束的索引对应角度。从而第一节点和第二节点可以使用相应的波束进行波束扫描，减小波束扫描的范围，降低时延和开销。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一信息还包括第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项，所述第一子信息包括所述第一链路的方向、所述第一链路的距离、所述第二链路的方向以及所述第二链路的距离，所述第二子信息包括所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息；其中，所述第一链路是所述第一节点和所述第三节点之间的链路，所述第二链路是所述第二节点和所述第三节点之间的链路；其中，所述协作节点根据所述第一信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所述第二节点的波束信息，包括：所述协作节点根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息；所述协作节点根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第二节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第二节点的波束信息。
可选的，所述协作节点根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项，确定第三链路的方向；根据所述第三链路的方向，确定所述第一节点和所述第二节点的波束信息，其中第三链路是所述第一节点和所述第二节点之间用于通信的链路。
协作节点可以依据第一链路的距离和方向，第二链路的距离和方向根据几何关系确定第三链路的方向，从而依据第三链路的方向和候选波束的信息确定第一节点和第二节点的波束信息。
协作节点还可以依据第一节点的位置信息和第二节点的位置信息，确定第三链路的方向，根据第三链路的方向和候选波束的信息确定第一节点和第二节点的波束信息。
从而协作节点能够从候选波束的信息中选择与第三链路方向接近的波束作为第一节点和第二节点的通信波束，减少第一节点和第二节点连接时波束扫描的范围，降低时延和开销。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所 述第二节点的波束信息之前，还包括：所述协作节点根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项，确定所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的距离；当所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的距离小于预设阈值时，所述协作节点确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所述第二节点的波束信息。
当第一节点和第二节点之间的距离小于预设阈值，第一节点和第二节点通信时信道质量不会由于距离较远达不到需求，减少不必要的连接和配置，降低协作节点协调开销和第一节点、第二节点上报的开销
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述协作节点执行以下至少一项操作：向所述第一节点发送所述第一节点的发送资源信息；或者，向所述第二节点发送所述第二节点的接收资源信息；其中，所述第一节点的发送资源信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束的资源，所述第二节点的接收资源信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束的资源。
协作节点为第一节点和第二节点配置发送或接收波束的资源，从而应对双工匹配，避免资源冲突。
可选的，协作节点是根据第一节点和第二节点的候选资源信息确定二者的资源信息。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述协作节点是所述第二节点或所述第三节点，所述协作节点向所述第一节点发送所述第一节点的发送功率信息，所述第一节点的发送功率信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送功率。
可选的，协作节点根据获取的第三信息确定所述第一节点的发送功率，所述第三信息包括所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的距离信息、所述第一节点在所述第一链路的天线增益信息、所述第二节点在所述第二链路的天线增益信息和所述协作节点预测的第三链路的路损信息中的至少一项，其中所述第三链路是所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间用于通信的链路；所述协作节点根据所述第三信息，确定所述第一节点的发送功率。其中所述第三节点与所述第一节点之间的链路为第一链路，所述第三节点与所述第二节点之间的链路为第二链路。
协作节点确定第一节点和第二节点进行通信时第一节点的发送功率，保证合适的发送功率，避免功率较大时影响其他链路，功率较小时信道质量不高需要增加发送功率。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述协作节点是所述第一节点或所述第三节点，所述协作节点向所述第二节点发送第二节点的反馈资源信息，所述第二节点的反馈资源信息用于指示所述第二节点的反馈资源，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述协作节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
协作节点配置第二节点的反馈资源，从而可以及时由第二节点向协作节点反馈第一节点与第二节点间的波束配对状态、第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态和第一节点与第二节点间的信道质量，在波束配对失败、数据传输失败、信道质量较差时，可以及时触发重新配置波束或选择其他波束进行通信。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点、所述第二节点和所述第三节点均使用全局坐标系GCS。
三个节点均使用GCS，保证了三个节点进行信令交互时能够理解其他节点的关于方向 的参数，提高了信息交互的速度。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点和/或所述第二节点使用局部坐标系LCS，所述协作节点使用全局坐标系GCS；所述协作节点根据所述第一参考信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息和/或所述第二节点的波束信息，包括：所述协作节点将所述第一参考信息中对应LCS的候选波束的信息转换为对应GCS的候选波束的信息，得到转换后的第一参考信息；所述协作节点根据所述转换后的第一参考信息，确定所述第一节点和所述第二节点对应GCS的候选波束的信息；所述协作节点将所述第一节点和所述第二节点对应GCS的候选波束的信息转换为对应LCS的波束信息，得到所述第一节点的波束信息和/或所述第二节点的波束信息。
当三个节点坐标系不同时，协作节点可以将与坐标系相关的候选波束的信息转换成协作节点所在坐标系的信息，从而能够在使得本申请技术方案适用的范围更广，增加本申请的应用场景。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述协作节点为所述第三节点，所述协作节点获取第一信息，包括：所述协作节点直接从所述第一节点获取所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；所述协作节点直接通过所述第二节点获取所述第二节点的候选波束的信息；或者，所述协作节点为所述第一节点或所述第二节点中的一者，所述协作节点获取第一信息，包括：所述协作节点间接通过所述第三节点获取所述第一节点或所述第二节点中的另一者的候选波束的信息。
当协作节点是不是需要建立通信的第一节点或第二节点时，协作节点可以直接通过与第一节点或第二节点之间的链路获取其候选波束的信息；当协作节点是第一节点和第二节点中一者时，协作节点可以通过第三节点获取第三链路对侧节点的候选波束的信息，从而协作节点变化不会影响波束信息的配置，保证及时有效的信息传递。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述协作节点执行以下至少一项操作：所述协作节点向所述第一节点发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括所述第一节点的波束信息；或者，所述协作节点向所述第二节点发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二节点的波束信息。
当协作节点为第一节点和/或第二节点配置波束信息后，可以将该配置的波束信息发送给第一节点和/或第二节点，从而第一节点和/或第二节点依据该波束信息进行通信，避免进行全范围的波束扫描，减小波束扫描的开销。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述协作节点为所述第三节点，所述第三节点为中继节点或信源节点。
信源节点或中继节点作为协作节点辅助链路建立过程，可以减小波束扫描的时延和开销。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述协作节点为所述第一节点，所述协作节点为信源节点或信宿节点。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述协作节点为所述第一节点、所述第二节点和所述第三节点之间协商确定的，或者为预配置的节点。
协作节点可以是协商确定或预配置的节点，从而协作节点可能具有较强的获取位置信息、方向信息、距离信息的节点，可能具有较强的处理能力或计算能力，或者与其他节点 的位置较近，从而便于配置过程中信令的传递。
第二方面，提供了一种波束配置方法，应用于通信系统中，所述通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，协作节点为所述第三节点或所述第二节点，所述方法包括：所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；所述第一节点接收来自所述协作节点的第一节点的波束信息，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束或接收波束。
本申请提供的技术方案中，第一节点向协作节点发送候选波束的信息，从而协作节点能够从中确定第一节点用于与第二节点进行通信的波束，降低开销和时延。
这里，第一节点可以为发送节点，也可以为接收节点。当第一节点为发送节点时，该第一节点的波束信息用于指示第一节点的发送波束。当第一节点为接收节点时，该第一节点的波束信息用于指示第一节点的接收波束。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息之前，还包括：所述第一节点接收所述协作节点发送的第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报所述第一节点的候选波束的信息。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中的至少一项相关的信息。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的索引、所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的候选波束的个数是所述第一节点根据所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息确定的。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二节点的位置信息是所述第一节点从所述协作节点接收的。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的波束的索引和所述第一节点的波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；或者，所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的波束序列。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的波束信息是根据第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第一节点的候选波束的信息确定的；其中，所述第一子信息包括所述第一链路的方向、所述第一链路的距离、所述第二链路的方向以及所述第二链路的距离，所述第二子信息包括所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息；所述第一链路是所述第一节点和所述第三节点之间的链路，所述第二链路是所述第二节点和所述第三节点之间的链路。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送第一节点的候选资源信息，所述第一节点的候选资源信息用于所述协作节点确定所述第一节点的发送波束或接收波束的资源以及述第一节点的反馈资源中的至少一项，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述协作节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第一节点接收来自所述协作 节点的第一节点的资源信息，所述第一节点的资源信息包括所述第一节点的发送波束或接收波束的资源以及所述第一节点的反馈资源中的至少一项，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述协作节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的天线增益信息，所述天线增益信息用于所述协作节点确定所述第一节点在第三链路上的发送功率；其中所述第三链路是所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间用于通信的链路。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第一节点是所述第一节点和所述第二节点之间的发送节点，所述第一节点接收来自所述协作节点的第一节点的发送功率信息，所述发送功率信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送功率。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点、所述第二节点和所述第三节点均使用全局坐标系GCS。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点使用全局坐标系GCS，所述协作节点使用局部坐标系LCS，还包括：所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述LCS到所述GCS的转换系数，其中所述LCS到所述GCS的转换系数用于所述协作节点为所述第一节点配置对应于所述GCS的波束信息。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述协作节点为所述第三节点，所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，包括：所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，所述协作节点为所述第二节点，所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，包括：所述第一节点通过所述第三节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点为中继节点、信宿节点、信源节点中任一种。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间的距离小于预设阈值。
第二方面以及第二方面的任一种实现方式中的方法所能达到的有益效果可参考对应的第一方面所述方法中的有益效果，此处不再赘述。
第三方面，提供了一种波束配置方法，应用于通信系统中，所述通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，协作节点为所述第三节点或所述第二节点，所述方法包括：所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；所述第一节点接收来自所述协作节点的第一节点的波束信息，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束。
本申请提供的技术方案中，第一节点作为第一节点与第二节点通信时的发送节点，向协作节点发送其候选波束的信息，从而协作节点能够根据该候选波束的信息确定第一节点的发送波束信息，降低开销和时延。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息之前，还包括：所述第一节点接收所述协作节点发送的第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报所述第一节点的候选波束的信息。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中的至少一项相关的信息。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的索引、所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的波束的索引和所述第一节点的波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；或者，所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的波束序列。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的候选波束的个数是所述第一节点根据所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息确定的。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二节点的位置信息是所述第一节点从所述协作节点接收的。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的波束信息是根据第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第一节点的候选波束的信息确定的；其中，所述第一子信息包括所述第一链路的方向、所述第一链路的距离、所述第二链路的方向以及所述第二链路的距离，所述第二子信息包括所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第一节点接收来自所述协作节点的第一节点的资源信息，所述第一节点的资源信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束的资源。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点在所述第一链路的天线增益信息，所述天线增益信息用于所述协作节点确定所述第一节点在第三链路上的发送功率；其中所述第三链路是所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间用于通信的链路。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第一节点是所述第一节点和所述第二节点之间的发送节点，所述第一节点接收来自所述协作节点的所述第一节点的发送功率信息，所述第一节点的发送功率信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送功率。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点、所述第二节点和所述第三节点均使用全局坐标系GCS。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点使用全局坐标系GCS，所述协作节点使用局部坐标系LCS，还包括：所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述LCS到所述GCS的转换系数，其中所述LCS到所述GCS的转换系数用于所述协作节点为所述第一节点配置对应于所述GCS的波束信息。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述协作节点为所述第三节点，所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，包括：所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，所述协作节点为所述第二节点，所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，包括：所述第一节点通过所述第三节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点为中继节点、信宿节点、信 源节点中任一种。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第三链路的距离小于预设阈值。
第三方面以及第三方面的任一种实现方法中的方法所能达到的有益效果可参考对应的第一方面所述方法中的有益效果，此处不再赘述。
第四方面，提供了一种波束配置方法，应用于通信系统中，所述通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，协作节点为所述第三节点或所述第一节点，所述方法包括：所述第二节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；所述第二节点接收来自所述协作节点的第二节点的波束信息，所述第二节点的波束信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束。
本申请提供的技术方案中，第二节点作为第一节点和第二节点进行通信时的接收节点，向协作节点发送其候选波束的信息，从而协作节点能够根据该候选波束的信息确定第二节点的接收波束信息，降低开销和时延。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第二节点向所述协作节点发送所述第二节点的候选波束的信息之前，还包括：所述第二节点接收所述协作节点发送的第二请求信息，所述第二请求信息用于指示所述第二节点上报所述第二节点的候选波束的信息。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二节点的候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中的至少一项相关的信息。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第二节点的候选波束的索引、所述第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第二节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二节点的候选波束的个数是所述第二节点根据所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息确定的。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的位置信息是所述第二节点从所述协作节点接收的。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二节点的波束信息包括所述第二节点的波束的索引和所述第二节点的波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；或者，所述第二节点的波束信息包括所述第二节点的波束序列。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二节点的波束信息是根据第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第一节点的候选波束的信息确定的；其中，所述第一子信息包括所述第一链路的方向、所述第一链路的距离、所述第二链路的方向以及所述第二链路的距离，所述第二子信息包括所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第二节点接收来自所述协作节点的第二节点的资源信息，所述第二节点的资源信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束的资源以及所述第二节点的反馈资源中的至少一项，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述协作节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第二节点向所述协作节点发送所述第二节点在所述第二链路的天线增益信息，所述天线增益信息用于所述协作节点确 定所述第一节点在第三链路上的发送功率；其中所述第三链路是所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间用于通信的链路。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点、所述第二节点和所述第三节点均使用全局坐标系GCS。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点使用全局坐标系GCS，所述协作节点使用局部坐标系LCS，还包括：所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述LCS到所述GCS的转换系数，其中所述LCS到所述GCS的转换系数用于所述协作节点为所述第一节点配置对应于所述GCS的波束信息。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述协作节点为所述第三节点，所述第二节点向所述协作节点发送所述第二节点的候选波束的信息，包括：所述第二节点直接向所述协作节点发送所述第二节点的候选波束的信息；或者，所述协作节点为所述第一节点，所述第二节点向所述协作节点发送所述第二节点的候选波束的信息，包括：所述第二节点通过所述第三节点间接向所述协作节点发送所述第二节点的候选波束的信息。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二节点为中继节点、信宿节点、信源节点中任一种。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第三链路的距离小于预设阈值。
第四方面以及第四方面的任一种实现方式中的方法所能达到的有益效果可参考对应的第一方面所述方法中的有益效果，此处不再赘述。
第五方面，提供了一种波束配置方法，所述方法包括：第一节点获取第二节点的位置信息；所述第一节点根据所述第一节点的位置信息、所述第二节点的位置信息和所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送或接收波束。
本申请提供的技术方案中，第一节点根据第一节点的位置信息和获取的第二节点的位置信息，确定第一节点自身的波束信息，从而避免第一节点在与第二节点进行通信时，进行全范围波束扫描，能够降低开销和时延。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点根据所述第一节点的位置信息、所述第二节点的位置信息和所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息，包括：所述第一节点根据所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息，确定所述第三链路的方向；所述第一节点根据所述第一节点的候选波束的信息和所述第三链路的方向，确定所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，其中所述第三链路是所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间用于通信的链路。
第一节点可以根据第一节点的位置信息和第二节点的位置信息，确定第三链路的方向，之后根据第三链路的方向在第一节点波束中选择与该方向接近的波束作为候选波束，减小波束扫描的范围，减小开销和时延。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中至少一项相关的信息。
候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理位置范围中至少一项相关的信息意味着第一节点根据第二节点和第一节点的位置确定了全部波束信息或部分波束信息作为候选波束信息。当候选波束信息是部分波束信息时，第一节点可以在该部分波束信息中进一步确定 其波束信息，减小波束扫描范围，降低开销和时延。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，其特征在于，所述第一节点获取第二节点的位置信息，包括：所述第一节点通过第三节点获取所述第二节点的位置信息，其中所述第三节点与所述第一节点之间的链路为第一链路，所述第三节点与所述第二节点之间的链路为第二链路。
由于第一节点和第二节点没有直接的链路，第一节点获取第二节点的位置信息需要通过第三节点，通过第三节点辅助第一节点和第二节点之间的信息传递，便于第一节点确定自己与第二节点通信的波束信息，降低扫描开销和时延。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第一节点通过所述第三节点向所述第二节点转发所述第一节点的位置信息，所述第一节点的位置信息用于所述第二节点确定所述第二节点的波束信息。
第一节点还通过第三节点向第二节点转发第一节点的位置信息，从而第二节点也可以根据第一节点的位置信息确定自己的波束信息，降低第二节点与第一节点通信时的波束扫描的范围，降低时延和开销。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第一节点通过所述第三节点向所述第二节点转发所述第一节点的位置信息之前，还包括：所述第一节点接收所述第三节点发送的第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报第一地理范围对应的坐标。
第一节点可以基于请求将第一地理范围对应的坐标通过第三节点发送给第二节点，从而在第一节点和第二节点需要通信时，第一节点及时应请求信息上报第一地理范围对应的坐标，第二节点及时据此确定自己的波束信息，减小波束扫描范围，降低时延和开销。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二节点的位置信息包括所述第二节点的位置坐标和/或所述第二节点的地理位置范围。
第二节点的位置信息为坐标时，第一节点可以确定的候选波束的信息角度范围较小，第一节点可以在更小的范围内进行波束扫描；
第二节点的位置信息为地理位置范围时，第二节点上报该地理位置范围所需要的开销较小，从而减轻第二节点的开销，第一节点根据第二节点的地理位置范围进行波束扫描，降低第一节点的扫描开销和时延。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第一节点接收来自所述第三节点的第一节点的资源信息，所述第一节点的资源信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送或接收波束的资源和/或所述第一节点的反馈资源，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述第三节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间波束的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态或和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
第三节点可以通过获取第一节点的候选资源，结合第二节点的候选资源，为第一节点和第二节点配置通信波束对应的资源，以便于应对双工匹配，减少资源冲突。
第三节点还可以为第一节点和第二节点之中的接收节点配置反馈资源，反馈波束配对状态、数据传输状态和信道质量，从而在数据传输失败或信道质量过差时，触发及时重新确定波束信息，减小信息传递的时延，增加数据传输可靠性。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第一节点是所述第一节点和 所述第二节点间的发送节点，所述第一节点向所述第三节点发送所述第一节点在所述第一链路的天线增益信息，所述天线增益信息用于所述第三节点确定所述第一节点的发送功率。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：所述第一节点是所述第一节点和所述第二节点间的发送节点，所述第一节点接收所述第三节点发送的所述第一节点的发送功率信息，所述发送功率信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送功率。
第三节点确定第一节点和第二节点进行通信时第一节点的发送功率，保证合适的发送功率，避免功率较大时影响其他链路，功率较小时信道质量不高需要增加发送功率。
第六方面，提供了一种装置，应用于通信系统中，所述通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，其所述装置为协作节点，所述协作节点是所述第一节点、所述第二节点和所述第三节点中的任一节点，所述装置包括：收发单元，用于获取第一信息，所述第一信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的信息和所述第二节点的候选波束的信息；处理单元，用于根据所述第一信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所述第二节点的波束信息，其中，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束，所述第二节点的波束信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束。
本申请提供的技术方案中，该装置的收发单元通过获取第一节点的候选波束的信息和第二节点的候选波束的信息，处理单元根据该信息，确定第一节点的波束信息和第二节点的波束信息，减小第一节点和第二节点进行通信时波束扫描的开销和时延。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述收发单元具体用于通过以下至少一种方式获取所述第一信息：接收所述第一节点上报的所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，接收所述第二节点上报的所述第二节点的候选波束的信息。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述收发单元，还用于执行以下至少一项操作：向所述第一节点发送第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，向所述第二节点发送第二请求信息，所述第二请求信息用于指示所述第二节点上报所述第二节点的候选波束的信息。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中至少一项相关的信息。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的索引、所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项；所述第二节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第二节点的候选波束的索引、所述第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第二节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选波束的个数是根据所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息确定的。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的发送波束的索引和所述第一节点的发送波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；所述第二节点的波束信息包括所述第二节点的接收波束的索引和所述第二节点的接收波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；或者，所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的发送波束序列；所述第二节点的波束信息包括所述第二节点的接收波束序列。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一信息还包括第一子信息和第二子 信息中的至少一项，所述第一子信息包括所述第一链路的方向、所述第一链路的距离、所述第二链路的方向以及所述第二链路的距离，所述第二子信息包括所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息；其中，所述第一链路是所述第三节点与所述第一节点之间的链路，所述第二链路是所述第三节点与所述第二节点之间的链路所述处理单元具体用于：根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息；根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第二节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第二节点的波束信息。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述处理单元还用于：根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项，确定所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的距离；当所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的距离小于预设阈值时，确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所述第二节点的波束信息。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述收发单元，还用于获取第二信息，所述第二信息包括所述第一节点的候选资源信息和所述第二节点的候选资源信息；所述处理单元，还用于根据所述第二信息，确定所述第一节点的发送资源信息和所述第二节点的接收资源信息，所述第一节点的发送资源信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束的资源，所述第二节点的接收资源信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束的资源。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述收发单元，还用于发送所述第一节点的发送资源信息和/或所述第二节点的接收资源信息，所述第一节点的发送资源信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束的资源，所述第二节点的接收资源信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束的资源。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述收发单元，还用于获取第三信息，所述第三信息包括所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的距离信息、所述第一节点在所述第一链路的天线增益信息、所述第二节点在所述第二链路的天线增益信息、所述协作节点预测的第三链路的路损信息中的至少一项，其中所述第三链路是所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间用于通信的链路；所述处理单元，还用于根据所述第三信息，确定所述第一节点的发送功率。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述收发单元，还用于向所述第一节点发送所述第一节点的发送功率信息，所述第一节点的发送功率信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送功率。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述处理单元，还用于确定所述第二节点的反馈资源信息，所述第二节点的反馈资源信息用于指示所述第二节点的反馈资源，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述协作节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述协作节点为所述第三节点，所述收发单元具体用于：通过所述第一节点获取所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；通过所述第二节点获取所述第二节点的候选波束的信息；或者，所述协作节点为所述第一节点或所述第二节点中的一者，所述收发单元具体用于：通过所述第三节点获取所述第一节点或所述第二节点中的另一者的候选波束的信息。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述装置还包括收发单元，所述收发单元用于所述收发单元用于执行以下至少一项操作：向所述第一节点发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括所述第一节点的波束信息；或者，向所述第二节点发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二节点的波束信息。
第七方面，提供了一种装置，应用于通信系统中，所述通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，协作节点为所述第三节点或所述第二节点，所述装置为所述第一节点，所述装置包括：收发单元，用于向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；所述收发单元，还用于接收来自所述协作节点的第一节点的波束信息，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束或接收波束。
本申请提供的技术方案中，该装置的收发单元发送自己的候选波束的信息，收发单元接收协作节点为其配置的波束信息，该波束信息是根据该候选波束的信息确定的，从而第一节点使用波束信息进行波束扫描，减小第一节点和第二节点进行通信时波束扫描的范围，减小开销和时延
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述收发单元，还用于：接收所述协作节点发送的第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报所述第一节点的候选波束的信息。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中的至少一项相关的信息。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的索引、所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的候选波束的个数是根据所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息确定的。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二节点的位置信息是从所述协作节点接收的。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的波束的索引和所述第一节点的波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；或者，所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的波束序列。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点的波束信息是根据第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第一节点候选波束的信息确定的；其中，所述第一子信息包括所述第一链路的方向、所述第一链路的距离、所述第二链路的方向以及所述第二链路的距离，所述第二子信息包括所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述收发单元，还用于向所述协作节点发送第一节点的候选资源信息，所述第一节点的候选资源信息用于所述协作节点确定所述第一节点的发送波束或接收波束的资源和所述第一节点的反馈资源中的至少一项，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述协作节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述收发单元，还用于接收来自所述协作 节点的资源信息，所述资源信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束或接收波束的资源和所述第一节点的反馈资源中的至少一项。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述收发单元，还用于向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点在所述第一链路的天线增益信息，所述天线增益信息用于所述协作节点确定所述第一节点在第三链路上的发送功率；其中所述第三链路是所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间用于通信的链路。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一节点是所述第一节点和所述第二节点之间的发送节点，所述收发单元，还用于接收来自所述协作节点发送的第一节点的发送功率信息，所述第一节点的发送功率信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送功率。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述协作节点为所述第三节点，所述收发单元，具体用于：通过所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，所述协作节点为所述第二节点，所述收发单元，具体用于：通过所述第三节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息。
第八方面，提供了一种装置，包括用于执行第三方面或第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中方法的模块或单元。该模块或单元可以是硬件电路，也可是软件，也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。
第九方面，提供了一种装置，包括用于执行第四方面或第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中方法的模块或单元。该模块或单元可以是硬件电路，也可是软件，也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。
第十方面，提供了一种装置，包括用于执行第五方面或第五方面中任一种可能实现方式中方法的模块或单元。该模块或单元可以是硬件电路，也可是软件，也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。
第十一方面，提供了一种装置，包括至少一个处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储指令，以实现上述第一方面至第五方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地，该装置还包括存储器，该存储器与处理器可能是分离部署的，也可能是集中部署的。可选地，该装置还包括通信接口，处理器与通信接口耦合。
第十二方面，提供了一种装置，所述装置包括至少一个逻辑电路和输入/输出接口，所述逻辑电路用于与输入/输出接口耦合，通过所述输入/输出接口传输数据，以执行如上述第一方面至第五方面或第一方面至第五方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十三方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，存储有计算机可执行指令，当计算机可执行指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如第一方面至第五方面或第一方面至第五方面中任一种实现方式中的方法。
第十四方面，提供一种计算机程序产品，包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码被运行时，使得计算机执行如第一方面至第五方面或第一方面至第五方面中任一种实现方式中的方法。
第十五方面，提供一种系统，包括第五方面或第五方面的任意一种实现方式中的装置和第六方面或第六方面的任意一种实现方式中的装置；或者包括第五方面或第五方面的任意一种实现方式中的装置、第七方面或第七方面的任一种实现方式中的装置和第八方面或第八方面的任一种实现方式中的装置。
第十六方面，提供一种通信系统，包括上述提及的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点。
可以理解的是，上述提供的任一种装置、芯片系统、计算机可读存储介质或计算机程序产品等均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法，因此，其所能达到的有益效果可参考对应的方法中的有益效果，此处不再赘述。
附图说明
图1是用于本申请实施例适用的通信系统的示意性构架图。
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
图3是本申请实施例提供的波束配置方法中所涉及的节点位置信息的示意图。
图4是本申请实施例提供的波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
图5是本申请实施例提供的一种波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
图6是对应于图5所示方法的时延示意图。
图7是本申请实施例提供的另一种波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
图8是本申请实施例提供的又一种波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
图9是对应于图8所示方法的时延示意图。
图10是本申请实施例提供的波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
图11是本申请实施例提供的一种波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
图13是本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意性框图。
图14是本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意性框图。
图15是本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意性框图。
图16是本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意性框图。
图17是本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意性框图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，包括但不限于：全球移动通讯(global system of mobile communication，GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access，CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service，GPRS)、长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system，UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access，WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5th generation，5G)移动通信系统(也称新无线(new radio，NR)系统)以及未来的移动通信系统如6G等。
随着无线通信标准的演进，通信系统支持的电磁波频率逐渐升高，如从小于100GHz的厘米波和毫米波，到大于100GHz的毫米波，再到太赫兹、几百太赫兹的光通信。随着频率的增高，电磁波的绕射能力变差，传播过程中的路径损耗也增大，覆盖范围也相应降低。为了保持一定的覆盖范围，需要降低路径损耗的影响。为此移动通信技术引入了波束 赋形技术，通过形成具有方向性的波束，来有效对抗路径损耗。波束赋形是基于天线阵列的信号预处理技术，具体通过波束赋形调整天线阵列中每个阵元的加权系数产生具有指向性的波束，从而获得明显的阵列增益。
大规模多输入多输出(multiple-input multiple-output，MIMO)系统可以在收发两端获得方向性很强且高增益的波束。方向性很强也意味着覆盖范围较窄，偏离波束覆盖范围后通信也往往会中断。所以在收发两端进行波束对齐就很重要，波束扫描即是确定合适的通信波束的过程。
两个设备(例如网络设备与终端设备之间，或者两个终端设备之间)在建立通信链路的过程中，需要进行波束扫描以对齐收发波束。例如，两个设备通信之前，首先需要进行同步。该两个设备中的每个设备需要进行周期性波束扫描以供其他设备发现或发现其他设备或建立连接，其中在每个扫描周期内，都需要使用全部或大的波束范围内的各个波束分别发送或接收同步信号。
以5G新无线(New Radio，NR)对同步信号块(synchronization signal block，SS block)进行波束周期性扫描为例，多个不同的同步信号块可以构成一个同步信号块突发集合(burst set)，该同步信号块突发集合在5ms的时间窗内传输。同步信号块突发集合的传输周期可以配置为{5,10,20,40,80,160}ms中的一个值，因此5G NR支持最小5ms的同步波束扫描周期。NR收发端使用基于时分复用(time division multiplex，TDM)的波束扫描方式进行波束对齐，初始接入时延较大。
也就是说，设备在进行波束扫描时，需要进行全部或大的波束范围内的盲扫，对齐时间较长，时延大，能耗高，无法满足快速接入的需求。针对以上问题，本申请提出了一种波束配置方法，能够降低波束扫描的开销和时延，从而提高接入效率。
为了便于理解本申请实施例，首先结合图1对适用于本申请实施例的通信系统进行详细说明。
图1是适用于本申请实施例的通信系统的示意性架构图。如图1所示，该通信系统包括多个节点，该多个节点中的任意两个节点之间可以相互发现或建立通信链路。示例性的，该通信系统可以包括第一节点110、第二节点120和第三节点130，该三个节点中两两节点之间可以建立链路以进行通信。
本申请实施例对该通信系统中的节点的类型不作限定，以图1为例，第一节点110、第二节点120和第三节点130可以均为网络设备，也可以均为终端设备，或者部分节点为终端设备，部分节点为网络设备。
示例性的，图1中的任一节点可以为终端设备。终端设备也可以称为用户设备、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置等。终端设备包括但不限于：蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备，未来6G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)中的终端设备等，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
示例性的，图1中的任一节点可以是网络设备。网络设备可以是为终端设备提供无线 通信功能的设备。该网络设备可以是全球移动通讯(global system of mobile communication，GSM)系统或码分多址(code division multiple access，CDMA)中的基站(base transceiver station，BTS)，也可以是宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)系统中的基站(node B，NB)，还可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(evolutional NodeB，eNB或eNodeB)，还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器，或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来6G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备等，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
应理解，该通信系统可以包括至少三个节点，图1仅以通信系统包括三个节点为例对本申请技术方案进行说明，以下各实施例的节点个数不应该被理解成对本申请应用范围的限定。
在图1所示的通信系统中，任意两个节点之间可以基于波束赋形进行通信。例如，第一节点110、第二节点120、第三节点130中的任意一个节点可以具有天线阵列。本申请的应用场景包括低时延高可靠的通信场景，例如应用于工厂，车联网，无人机等通信场景。本申请实施例适用的系统包括采用高频频谱通信的系统，一般地，高频频谱如毫米波，太赫兹和光通信等应用于需要基于波束成形的通信技术中。
图2示出了本申请实施例提供的一种波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
图2示出的方法200应用于通信系统中，该通信系统可以包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点。该方法200可以由协作节点执行，其中协作节点可以为第一节点、第二节点和第三节点中的任一节点。
以图1为例，第一节点例如为图1中的第一节点110，第二节点例如为图1中的第二节点120，第三节点例如为图1中的第三节点130。第三节点130与第一节点110之间建立有第一链路，因此第三节点130与第一节点110可以通过第一链路进行通信。第三节点130与第二节点120之间建立有第二链路，因此第三节点130与第二节点120可以通过第二链路进行通信。第一节点110和第二节点120之间的第三链路可以为待建立链路或者待确定波束链路。图2示出的方法200可以由图1所示通信系统中的任一节点例如第一节点110、第二节点120或第三节点130执行。
本申请实施例中，方法200可以包括步骤S210和步骤S220，下面结合附图对各个步骤进行详细介绍。
S210，协作节点获取第一信息。
该第一信息包括第一节点的候选波束的信息和第二节点的候选波束的信息。
该协作节点可以为第一节点、第二节点和第三节点中的任意一个。本申请实施例中，协作节点用于为第一节点和第二节点进行波束配置。该协作节点可以是系统预定义或预配置的，例如系统根据第一节点、第二节点和第三节点之中某一节点具有较强的计算能力或具有较强的根据当前链路确定距离、位置、方向(波束角度)的能力而确定该节点为协作节点，示例性的，该协作节点可以为路边站(road side unit，RSU)。或者，协作节点可以由通信系统中的节点协商确定，例如由第一节点、第二节点、第三节点及其附近节点协商确定。例如，若某个节点能够直接或间接获得待建立链路的第一节点和/或第二节点的相关信息，且由其进行协作可能具有较小的开销和较短的时延，则可以确定该节点为协作 节点。如协作节点为信源节点或中继节点。
应理解，本申请实施例所涉及的协作，可以理解为是对待建立链路或待确定波束链路所对应的两个节点进行波束配置。
在本申请实施例中，第三节点和第一节点之间的链路为第一链路，第一链路是已建立的链路，即第一节点和第三节点之间有配置好的发送波束、接收波束及发送波束、接收波束对应的资源和其他相关配置信息。因此第一节点和第三节点能够使用配置好的波束及资源进行数据传输。
同样，第三节点和第二节点之间的链路为第二链路，第二链路也是已建立的链路，第二节点和第三节点能够使用配置好的波束及资源进行数据传输。
本申请实施例中，第一节点与第二节点之间不能直接进行数据传输，例如第一节点和第二节点没有配置好的发送波束或接收波束，或者即使配置好发送波束或接收波束，也没有发送波束或接收波束对应的资源或其他配置信息。
在本申请实施例中，所涉及的资源可能为基于时分复用、频分复用(frequency division multiplex，FDM)的时频资源，或者为基于空分复用的空间资源等。
在本申请实施例中，协作节点获取第一信息可以为协作节点接收第一节点上报的第一节点的候选波束的信息；和/或，协作节点接收第二节点上报的第二节点的候选波束的信息。
对应的，第一节点和/或第二节点上报自己的候选波束的信息。
在一些实施例中，第一节点和/或第二节点可以主动上报各自的候选波束的信息，例如周期性上报，这样协作节点可以提前知道第一节点和/或第二节点的候选波束的信息，减小时延的同时，无需协作节点发送请求指令，减少信息交互的开销。
在一些实施例中，第一节点和/或第二节点可以响应协作节点的请求而上报各自的候选波束的信息。
示例性的，在协作节点获取第一信息之前，协作节点还可以执行以下动作：向第一节点发送第一请求信息，第一请求信息用于指示第一节点上报第一节点的候选波束的信息；和/或向第二节点发送第二请求信息，第二请求信息用于指示第二节点上报第二节点的候选波束的信息。
例如，当协作节点为第一节点时，协作节点获取第一信息之前，可以向第二节点发送第二请求信息，第二请求信息用于指示第二节点上报第二节点的候选波束的信息。这种情况下，第一节点可以直接从自身获取第一节点的候选波束的信息。
又如，当协作节点为第二节点时，协作节点获取第一信息之前，可以向第一节点发送第一请求信息，第一请求信息用于指示第一节点上报第一节点的候选波束的信息。这种情况下，第二节点可以直接从自身获取第二节点的候选波束的信息。
再如，当协作节点为第三节点时，协作节点获取第一信息之前，可以向第一节点发送第一请求信息，第一请求信息用于指示第一节点上报第一节点的候选波束的信息；以及向第二节点发送第二请求信息，第二请求信息用于指示第二节点上报第二节点的候选波束的信息。
对应的，在第一节点向协作节点发送第一节点的候选波束的信息之前，第一节点接收协作节点的第一请求信息；和/或，在第二节点向协作节点发送第二节点的候选波束的信 息之前，第二节点接收协作节点的第二请求信息。
从而，第一节点和/或第二节点应协作节点的请求上报各自的候选波束的信息。
上述的请求可以是协作节点获知有待发送的数据或协作节点根据估计的第一节点和第二节点间的距离小于一定阈值，从而触发请求信息的发送。对于第一节点和第二节点，该请求信息都是可选的，协作节点向第一节点和/或第二节点发送请求消息，能够使得第一节点和/或第二节点依据协作节点的需求再上报相关信息，保证候选波束的信息发送的及时与有效。
在本申请实施例中，候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中的至少一项相关的信息。
在一些实施例中，第一节点或第二节点的候选波束的信息可以包括第一节点或第二节点的全部波束或对应配置的最大波束个数的波束的信息。
例如，不限定角度范围或角度范围为360°，从而第一节点或第二节点的候选波束的信息包括第一节点或第二节点的全部波束或对应配置的最大波束个数的波束的信息。
在另一些实施例中，第一节点的候选波束的信息可以包括第一节点的部分波束的信息。例如，第一节点的候选波束的信息包括一定角度范围或者地理位置范围的波束的信息或对应配置的最大波束个数的子集。
上述角度可以为例如0-180°范围内的波束。地理位置也可以对应角度，例如第二节点的坐标在第一节点的偏北方向，第一节点与第二节点通信时，可以仅选择北偏西90°至和北偏东90°共180°的角度范围内的波束作为候选波束。上述角度范围可以是第一节点和/或第二节点各自确定仅上报该范围内的波束信息，也可以是协作节点在请求信息之前发送相关消息或在请求信息中携带对上报波束角度范围的限制，例如可以是协作节点依据确定的第三链路的方向确定一定范围的角度，或者说限定的角度可以以当前已连接链路的方向为参考。
当第一节点和/或第二节点仅上报部分范围内的波束信息时，能够减小第一节点和/或第二节点的上报开销。
在本申请实施例中，第一节点的候选波束的信息包括第一节点的候选波束的索引、第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项；第二节点的候选波束的信息包括第二节点的候选波束的索引、第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和第二节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
在一些实施例中，第一节点的候选波束的信息可以包括第一节点的候选波束的索引和第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；第二节点的候选波束的信息包括第二节点的候选波束的索引和第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项。
例如，第一节点的候选波束的信息可以只包括第一节点的候选波束的索引。
又如，第一节点的候选波束的信息可以只包括第一节点的候选波束的角度。
再如，第一节点的候选波束的信息可以包括第一节点的候选波束的索引和第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度。
示例性的，表1示出了二维坐标系下波束的索引和/或波束的索引对应角度各示例，其中Φ为对应的水平角度，即地理北方向与波束方向沿逆时针的夹角：
表1
Figure PCTCN2022133144-appb-000001
如表1所示，二维坐标系下可以将180度角度范围分成16等份，[0，11.25°)波束的索引为0，[11.25°，22.5°)波束的索引为1……[168.75°，180°)波束的索引为15。例如，当协作节点最终确定某节点发送/接收波束范围是20～40°时，对应波束的索引可以为1或2或3，协作节点即可以从这三个波束的索引中进一步确定该节点的发送或接收波束。
表1对于波束的索引和角度Φ的对应关系只是示意性给出，在其他情况下，同一角度范围由于波束更窄或更宽可能存在更多或更少的波束。例如，每个波束辐射范围是60°，180°范围内存在3个波束；每个波束辐射范围仅为5°，则180°范围内存在36个波束。波束辐射范围的确定与天线发射功率，天线个数与排布等因素有关，此处不进行详细叙述。
表2示出了三维坐标系收发波束方向和波束的索引的一种对应关系，其中Φ为对应的水平角度，即地理北方向与波束方向沿逆时针的夹角，θ为垂直角度，垂直方向为0度，水平方向为90度。
表2
Figure PCTCN2022133144-appb-000002
与表1类似，表2对于三维坐标系中波束的索引与波束的索引对应角度范围的示意性给出，此对应关系也可以随实际情况而变化。
当候选波束的信息为候选波束的索引及候选波束的索引对应角度时，候选波束的索引可以理解为区分候选波束的代号，对应角度则是该波束主要覆盖的范围。
从上文可以看出，波束的索引和/或波束的索引对应角度是为了区分同一节点的各个方向的波束，因此能将波束按照方向区分的信息或者可以转化为与方向对应的信息都可以作为候选波束的信息，具体的，可以包括波束编号、波束管理资源编号，上行信号资源号， 下行信号资源号、侧行信号资源号、波束的绝对索引、波束的相对索引、波束的逻辑索引、波束对应的天线端口的索引、波束对应的天线端口组索引、波束对应的下行信号的索引、波束对应的下行同步信号块的时间索引、波束对连接(beam pair 1ink,BPL)信息、波束对应的发送参数(Tx parameter)、波束对应的接收参数(Rx parameter)、波束对应的发送权重、波束对应的权重矩阵、波束对应的权重向量、波束对应的接收权重、波束对应的发送权重的索引、波束对应的权重矩阵的索引、波束对应的权重向量的索引、波束对应的接收权重的索引、波束对应的接收码本、波束对应的发送码本、波束对应的接收码本的索引、波束对应的发送码本的索引中的至少一种。
在另一些实施例中，第一节点的候选波束的信息可以包括第一节点的候选波束的个数，第二节点的候选波束的信息包括第二节点的候选波束的个数。该候选波束的个数是第一节点和/或第二节点发送给协作节点的。
例如，当协作节点是第三节点时，第一节点和第二节点将各自候选波束的个数发送给协作节点。
对应的，第三节点接收第一节点和第二节点发送的各自候选波束的个数。
以第二节点的候选波束的个数为例，第二节点可以依据第一节点的位置信息和第二节点的位置信息确定第二节点的候选波束的个数。
具体的，第二节点根据从协作节点处获得的链路对侧的节点或目标节点的位置信息确定两个节点之间连线的距离和方向，距离和方向可以是依据几何关系而计算。根据获得的方向，第二节点可以在自己的所有波束中选出角度接近链路方向的数个波束，从而将该数个波束作为候选波束，根据该数个波束确定候选波束的个数。
第一节点和第二节点确定候选波束的个数的过程如下：
步骤1，协作节点获取第一节点和第二节点的位置信息；
步骤2，协作节点将第一节点的位置信息发送给第二节点，将第二节点的位置信息发送给第一节点；
步骤3，第一节点根据第二节点的位置信息和自己的位置信息确定自己的候选波束的个数，第二节点根据第一节点的位置信息和自己的位置信息确定自己的候选波束的个数；
步骤4，第一节点和第二节点将各自的候选波束的信息发送给协作节点进行后续处理。
再如，当协作节点是第一节点时，第二节点将自己的候选波束的个数通过第三节点发送给第一节点。
第一节点将自身的位置信息通过第一链路和第二链路发送给第二节点，第二节点还可以将自身的位置信息通过第二链路和第一链路发送给第一节点，从而第一节点和第二节点都能够获知双方的位置信息。第二节点根据第一节点的位置信息确定自身的候选波束的个数，第一节点根据第二节点的位置信息确定自身的候选波束的个数。第二节点将自身的候选波束的个数发送给第一节点，从而由第一节点统一协调，配置波束信息。
又如，当协作节点是第二节点时，第一节点将自己的候选波束的个数通过第三节点发送给第二节点。
此情况和上面一种情况类似，第一节点确定自身的候选波束的个数的过程不再赘述，最终第一节点将自身的候选波束的个数通过第三节点发送给第二节点。
在本申请一些实施例中，第一信息还可以包括第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项， 第一子信息包括第一链路的方向、第一链路的距离、第二链路的方向以及第二链路的距离，第二子信息包括所述第一节点的位置信息和第二节点的位置信息；其中，第一链路是第一节点和第三节点之间的链路，第二链路是第二节点和第三节点之间的链路。
第一链路的方向即为第三节点和第一节点之间的连线的大致方向，第一链路的方向可以通过第一节点或第三节点的发送或接收波束获知，由于波束对应一定的角度，因此对应于第一链路，第一节点和第三节点进行数据传输时，所用的波束的方向大致都是第一节点和第三节点的连线的方向。
第一链路的距离即第一节点和第三节点之间的距离，又可以称为第一链路的长度，第二链路的距离即第二节点和第三节点之间的距离，又可以称为第二链路的长度。第一链路的距离可以通过第三节点与第一节点之间收发信号的时间差值计算，例如可以由第三节点向第一节点发送参考信号，第三节点即可以根据从第三节点发送到第一节点接收该参考信号的时间差值计算出第一链路的距离。
在一些实施例中，协作节点为第三节点，协作节点可以直接依据与第一节点的通信时使用的波束的方向确定第一链路方向，并确定第一链路的距离；依据与第二节点的通信时使用的波束的方向确定第二链路方向，并确定第二链路的距离，从而获取第一子信息。
在另一些实施例中，协作节点为第一节点，协作节点可以直接依据与第三节点通信使用的波束确定第一链路的方向，并确定第一链路的距离；而对于第二链路的方向和距离，第三节点与第二节点之间的链路为第二链路，可以由第三节点直接依据与第二节点通信的波束确定第二链路的方向，并由第三节点确定第二链路的距离。由于节点可能处于运动中，第三节点可以通过长周期的距离上报和短周期微距离更新将第二链路的距离报告给第一节点，长周期方向上报和短周期微方向更新将第二链路的方向上报给第一节点，从而协作节点获取第一子信息。
协作节点为第二节点的情况和第一节点类似，此处不再赘述。
这种通过长周期的距离或方向上报和微距离或方向更新可以节约上报的开销。
在一些实施例中，第一节点的位置信息和第二节点的位置信息可以为第一节点和第二节点的坐标，可以为绝对坐标，也可以为相对坐标，可以为全局坐标系(global coordinate system，GCS)下的坐标，也可以为局部坐标系(local coordinate system，LCS)下的坐标。
在另一些实施例中，位置信息可以为地理位置范围，例如坐标范围。
示例性的，可以将三个节点所在的区域范围划分为网格，从而确定节点所在的位置信息。
图3示出了本申请实施例提供的波束配置方法中所涉及的节点位置信息的示意图。
如图3所示，可以将8m*8m的区域划分为64个1m*1m的网格，因此，区分64个网格仅需要六位二进制数，例如规定每一横行从左对应的十进制数增加，每一竖行对应的十进制数从下往上增加，则离坐标原点最近的格点坐标为(0-1，0-1)，对应的十进制数为0，对应二进制数为(000000)，离原点最远的格点坐标为(7-8，7-8)，对应十进制数为63，对应二进制数为(111111)。例如，位置x的坐标为(2-3，5-6)，则其对应十进制数为42，对应二进制数为(101010)。
区域也可以被划分为其他数量的网格，例如32、128、256个等等，具体可以根据实际需求进行设计。例如若需要较高的定位精度，则可以将网格设置的小一些，则该固定区 域包括较多数量的网格。若需要较低的定位精度，则可以将网格设置的大一些，则该固定区域包括较少数量的网格，可以减少存储和信息上报的开销。换言之，位置区域的网格大小与定位精度相关，精度高，网格小些，精度低，网格大些。
上述网格化坐标的原点可以任意设置，可以为相对坐标系下的网格，也可以为绝对坐标系下的网格。原点如设置为第一节点、第二节点或第三节点中的任一个节点。这样，协作节点或其他各个节点仅需要对该网格范围内的区域进行量化，相比直接上报节点的坐标，能够减小位置信息上报和存储的开销。
S220，协作节点根据第一信息，确定第一节点的波束信息和第二节点的波束信息。
下面以第一节点为第三链路的发送节点，第二节点为第三链路的接收节点为例介绍S220，当第二节点为第三链路的发送节点，第一节点为第三链路的接收节点时，第一节点和第二节点可以完全互换，不会本申请的技术方案产生影响。
在本申请实施例中，第一节点的候选波束的信息包括第一节点的候选波束的索引、第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项；第二节点的候选波束的信息包括第二节点的候选波束的索引、第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第二节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
在一些实施例中，第一节点的波束信息包括的发送波束的索引和/或第一节点的发送波束的索引对应角度，第二节点的波束信息包括第二节点的接收波束的索引和/或第二节点的接收波束的索引对应角度。
第一节点的发送波束可以是确定的一个发送波束，也可以是多个发送波束。第二节点的接收波束可以是一个，也可以是多个。由于发送波束属于候选发送波束的子集，接收波束属于候选接收波束的子集，因此第一节点或第二节点在更小的范围内进行波束扫描，降低了第一节点、第二节点的波束扫描开销，减小时延和能耗。
应理解，此处的索引和/或索引对应角度同样是为了区分每个节点的不同波束，波束的索引和/或波束的索引对应角度可以和上述的候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度进行类似扩展。
在另一些实施例中，第一节点的候选波束的信息包括第一节点的候选波束的个数；第二节点的候选波束的信息包括第二节点的候选波束的个数。候选波束个数的含义与获取过程已经在S210中给出，为简洁，此处不再赘述。
在本申请实施例中，第一节点的波束信息包括第一节点的发送波束序列，第二节点的波束信息包括第二节点的接收波束序列。
示例性的，简单介绍一下波束序列。例如对于发送和接收波束各有两个波束的情况，发送波束可以记为Tx0，Tx1，接收波束可以记为Rx0，Rx1，从而协作节点可以确定发送波束序列为Tx0-Tx0-Tx1-Tx1，接收波束序列为Rx0-Rx1-Rx0-Rx1，从而在发送节点和接收节点进行波束扫描时，对应会产生四对发送-接收波束对，分别为Tx0-Rx0、Tx0-Rx1、Tx1-Rx0、Tx1-Rx1，从而能够将四种波束配对情况都包括在内。
在本申请实施例中，协作节点配置波束序列时，可以无需知道实际波束的信息，例如角度等，即可根据波束个数使用虚拟的波束索引例如上述的Tx0、Tx1、Rx0、Rx1，配置发送或接收波束序列，可以使得第一节点和第二节点进行波束配对时，可以遍历所有发送/接收波束组合，从而从中可以进一步选出较优质量的波束对进行数据传输。
协作节点根据第一信息，确定第一节点的波束信息和第二节点的波束信息。
在本申请实施例中，协作节点根据第一节点的候选波束的索引和/或第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第二节点的候选波束的索引和/或第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度，确定第一节点的发送波束的索引和/或第一节点的发送波束的索引对应角度、第二节点的接收波束的索引和/或第二节点的接收波束的引对应角度。
从而协作节点能够根据第一节点和第二节点的候选波束的索引和/或第一节点和第二节点的候选波束索引对应角度，确定第一节点和第二节点的波束索引和/或第一节点和第二节点的波束的索引对应角度。第一节点和第二节点在相应的波束范围内进行扫描，减小第一节点和第二节点的波束扫描范围，降低扫描开销和时延。
在本申请实施例中，协作节点根据第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项以及第一节点的候选波束的信息，确定第一节点的波束信息；协作节点根据第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项以及第二节点的候选波束的信息，确定第二节点的波束信息。
在一些实施例中，协作节点根据第一节点候选波束的索引和/或第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第二节点候选波束的索引和/或第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第一子信息确定第一节点的发送波束的索引和/或索引对应角度、第二节点的接收波束的索引和/或索引对应角度，第一子信息包括第一链路的距离和方向、第二链路的距离和方向。
协作节点根据第一子信息确定第三链路的方向，根据第三链路的方向，结合第一节点和第二节点的候选波束的索引和/或对应角度，从第一节点的候选波束中选出角度中与第三链路的方向接近的波束，作为第一节点的发送波束，从第二节点中选出角度与第三链路方向接近的波束，作为第二节点的接收波束。第一节点在发送波束的范围内进行波束扫描，第二节点在接收波束的范围内进行波束扫描，从而减小第一节点和第二节点的波束扫描范围，降低开销和时延。
其中，协作节点根据第一子信息，即第一链路的方向和距离、第二链路的方向和距离，能够确定第三链路的方向和距离。具体的，第一链路的方向和第二链路的方向可以确定第一链路与第二链路的夹角，再结合第一链路的距离、第二链路距离，依据由第一节点、第二节点和第三节点构成的三角形的几何性质，可以计算出第三链路的距离和方向。
在另一些实施例中，协作节点根据第一节点候选波束的索引和/或第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第二节点候选波束的索引和/或第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第二子信息确定第一节点的发送波束的索引和/索引对应角度、第二节点的接收波束的索引和/或索引对应角度，第二子信息包括第一节点的位置信息、第二节点的位置信息。
在另一些实施例中，协作节点根据第一节点候选波束的索引和/或第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第二节点候选波束的索引和/或第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第二子信息、第一子信息确定第一节点的发送波束的索引和/索引对应角度、第二节点的接收波束的索引和/或索引对应角度，第二子信息包括第一节点的位置信息、第二节点的位置信息。
本实施例是上述两者的结合，具体内容可参考上文相关内容的描述，为简洁，此处不再赘述。
协作节点根据第二子信息确定第三链路的方向，根据第三链路的方向，结合第一节点 和第二节点的候选波束的索引和/或对应角度，从第一节点的候选波束中选出角度中与第三链路的方向接近的波束，作为第一节点的发送波束，从第二节点中选出角度与第三链路方向接近的波束，作为第二节点的接收波束。第一节点在发送波束的范围内进行波束扫描，第二节点在接收波束的范围内进行波束扫描，从而减小第一节点和第二节点的波束扫描范围，降低开销和时延。
其中，协作节点根据第二子信息，即第一节点的位置信息、第二节点的位置信息可以确定第三链路的距离和方向。具体的，当位置信息是坐标时，协作节点容易根据第一节点的坐标和第二节点的坐标根据几何关系确定第三链路的距离和方向。当位置信息是地理位置范围时，协作节点可以在将第一节点和第二节点的地理位置范围内的某一点，例如几何的中心当作第一节点和第二节点的坐标，再依据上述几何方式计算第三链路的方向和距离；或者，可以将第一节点和第二节点的地理位置范围进行处理，可以计算出在两个地理位置范围内各取一点作为二者坐标时，两者连线的角度范围和距离范围即可以当作第三链路的方向范围和距离范围。从而获知第三链路的距离范围和方向范围，根据该距离范围和方向范围，结合第一节点和第二节点的候选波束的索引和/或第一节点和第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度，从第一节点的候选波束中选出角度中与第三链路的方向接近的波束，作为第一节点的发送波束，从第二节点中选出角度与第三链路方向接近的波束，作为第二节点的接收波束。第一节点在发送波束的范围内进行波束扫描，第二节点在接收波束的范围内进行波束扫描，从而减小第一节点和第二节点的波束扫描范围，降低开销和时延。
在另一些实施例中，协作节点根据第一节点候选波束的个数、第二节点候选波束的个数，确定第一节点的发送波束序列、第二节点的接收波束序列。
协作节点根据第一节点和第二节点候选波束的个数，为第一节点配置发送波束序列，为第二节点配置接收波束序列，从而使得第一节点和第二节点按照该波束序列进行扫描时，能快速进行波束对齐，选择最优波束，降低波束扫描的时延和开销。后选波束的个数的确定过程前文已经详细介绍，此处为简洁，不再赘述。
在另一些实施例中，协作节点根据第一节点候选波束的索引和/或第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第二节点候选波束的索引和/或第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第一子信息确定第一节点的发送波束序列、第二节点的接收波束序列，第一子信息包括第一链路的距离和方向、第二链路的距离和方向。
如前所述，协作节点可以根据第一节点候选波速的索引和/或索引对应角度、第二节点候选波速的索引和/或索引对应角度，结合第一子信息确定的第三链路的方向，确定第一节点和第二节点的波束索引和/索引对应角度，从而进一步确定第一节点和第二节点的候选波束的个数，根据候选波束的个数，确定第一节点的发送波束序列和第二节点的接收波束序列。根据该波束序列进行波束对齐，快速匹配最优波束对，减小波束扫描时延和开销。
在另一些实施例中，协作节点根据第一节点候选波束的索引和/或第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第二节点候选波束的索引和/或第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第二子信息确定第一节点的发送波束序列、第二节点的接收波束序列，第二子信息包括第一节点的位置信息、第二节点的位置信息。
如前所述，协作节点可以根据第一节点候选波速的索引和/或索引对应角度、第二节 点候选波速的索引和/或索引对应角度，结合第二子信息确定的第三链路的方向范围，确定第一节点和第二节点的波束索引和/索引对应角度，从而进一步确定第一节点和第二节点的候选波束的个数，根据候选波束的个数，确定第一节点的发送波束序列和第二节点的接收波束序列。根据该波束序列进行波束对齐，快速匹配最优波束对，减小波束扫描时延和开销。
在另一些实施例中，协作节点根据第一节点候选波束的索引和/或第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第二节点候选波束的索引和/或第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度、第一子信息、第二子信息确定第一节点的发送波束序列、第二节点的接收波束序列。
本实施例是以上几种技术方案中另外两者的结合，此处不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，当候选波束的信息仅包括候选波束索引时，协作节点若能够根据索引确定相应波束的角度，从而再依据上述根据第一子信息和/或第二子信息确定的第三链路的方向，选择索引对应波束中角度与第三链路相近的波束作为第一节点的发送波束或第二节点的接收波束，再将该索引发送给第一节点和/或第二节点，第一节点和第二节点即使用索引对应波束进行波束扫描，从而减小波束扫描范围，降低波束扫描开销和时延。
在一些实施例中，候选波束的信息仅包括候选波束角度，协作节点直接依据角度和根据第一子信息和/或第二子信息确定的第三链路的方向，确定第一节点的发送波束和第二节点的接收波束的角度，从而第一节点和第二节点使用该角度对应的波束进行波束扫描，减小波束扫描的范围，降低开销和时延。
若第一节点和/或第二节点上报一定角度范围或地理位置范围之内的波束的索引和/或波束的索引对应角度作为候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度，能够在减小第一节点和/或第二节点的上报开销的同时，协作节点仅需要在较少数量的波束中协调发送或接收波束，也进一步减小协作节点的协调开销。
在本申请实施例中，协作节点还可以根据依据第一信息和/或第二信息确定的第三链路的距离，决定是否触发对第一节点和/或第二节点的波束信息的配置。
在一些实施例中，第三链路的距离大于预设阈值，即使为第一节点和/或第二节点配置相应的波束信息，最终信道的质量可能也较差达不到需求，因此无需为其配置相应的波束。
在另一些实施例中，第三链路的距离小于预设阈值，信道质量可能较好，可以为其配置相应的波束。
在本申请实施例中，协作节点向所述第一节点发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息包括第一节点的波束信息；和/或，协作节点向第二节点发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息包括第二节点的波束信息。
对应的，第一节点接收协作节点的第一指示信息，第二节点接收来自协作节点的第二指示信息。
在协作节点在确定第一节点和/或第二节点的波束信息之后，即可以将对应的指示信息发送给第一节点和/或第二节点，指示第一节点和/或第二节点使用相应的波束进行扫描或者按照相应的序列进行扫描，减小波束扫描的时延和开销。
具体的，例如，当协作节点是第三节点时，协作节点可以为第一节点和第二节点配置相应的波束信息，并将包含第一节点波束信息的第一指示信息发送给第一节点，将包含第 二节点的波束信息的第二指示信息发送给第二节点。
当协作节点为第一节点时，协作节点可以为第二节点配置波束信息，并将包含第二节点的波束信息的第二指示信息发送给第二节点，协作节点还可以为自己配置波束信息，从而与第二节点通信。
当协作节点是第二节点时，可以为第一节点配置波束信息，并将包含第一节点波束信息的第一指示信息发送给第一节点。
上述三种情况中协作节点为第二节点配置波束信息并将包含第二节点的波束信息的第二指示信息发送给第二节点都是可选的，第二节点可以直接进行盲扫从而与第一节点通信。
在本申请实施例中，协作节点和第一节点和/或第二节点之间交互的信息中，包括很多角度、位置等与坐标系相关的信息。因此，协作节点能够灵活有效的配置相关信息需要协作节点能够与第一节点和/或第二节点对接收到的与坐标系相关的信息有同样的理解。
在一些实施例中，第一节点和/或第二节点处于使用相同的坐标系，能够满足上述理解相同的条件，无论该相同的坐标系为GCS还是LCS。
在另一些实施例中，协作节点与第一节点和/或第二节点之间使用的坐标系不同，在进行波束信息的确定之前，需要进行坐标系转换的过程。
示例性的，当部分节点使用LCS时，需要将波束的索引或者角度发送给使用GCS的节点进行转换后再发送至使用LCS的节点，或者将从LCS到GCS的转换系数发送给使用LCS的节点，LCS利用该转换系数转化成GCS后，再进行波束配置。
具体的，例如，以协作节点为第三节点为例，第一节点和第二节点之间有待建立或待确定波束的链路。第三节点使用GCS，第一节点和第二节点分别使用LCS1、LCS2，第三节点知道第一节点和第二节点的坐标转换系数，用于将LCS1坐标转换成GCS的坐标的转换系数为(α1，β1，γ1)，用于将LCS2坐标转换成GCS的坐标的转换系数为(α2，β2，γ2)，示例性的，坐标转换系数可以为矩阵。
协作节点接收到第一节点使用LCS1的与坐标相关的变量A，例如候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度，首先将变量A用(α1，β1，γ1)转换成GCS下的A1，再进行配置，例如使用GCS下的候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度配置波束的索引和/或波束的索引对应角度，将配置好的GCS下的波束的索引和/或波束的索引对应角度再利用该坐标转换系数转换为LCS1下的波束的索引和/或波束的索引对应角度发送给第一节点，从而完成该配置。
对于波束的配置，由于索引不会随坐标变化而变化，协作节点在将候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度转换成候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度(GCS)，即可以只将配置好的索引发送给第一节点，从而减少一次坐标转换的过程。
又如，协作节点为第三节点，第一节点和第二节点之间有待建立或待确定波束的链路。第三节点使用LCS3，第一节点和第二节点使用GCS。
协作节点接收到第一节点GCS下的候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度，协作节点收到第一节点或第二节点发送的将LCS3转换成GCS的坐标转换系数(α3，β3，γ3)，第三节点依据该坐标转换系数将第三节点的部分参数转换成GCS下的参数，从而可以直接根据第一节点GCS下的候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度，为 第一节点配置GCS下的波束的索引和/波束的索引对应角度，配置结束后，直接将配置好的GCS下的第一节点的候选波束的索引和/或第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度发送给第一节点。
第三节点也可以将GCS下第一节点和/或第二节点的候选波束的信息转换成LCS3下的候选波束的信息，配置完波束信息再转换成GCS下的信息，再将该信息发送给第一节点和/或第二节点。以上过程和前述的类似，只是坐标转换的方向不同，因此坐标转换系数也需要相应变化。
在本申请实施例中，除了对波束进行配置，协作节点还可以获取第二信息，第二信息包括第一节点的候选资源信息和第二节点的候选资源信息；协作节点根据第二信息，确定第一节点的发送资源信息和第二节点的接收资源信息，第一节点的发送资源信息用于指示第一节点的发送波束的资源，第二节点的接收资源信息用于指示第二节点的接收波束的资源。
对应的，第一节点和第二节点上报各自的候选资源信息。
在一些实施例中，第一节点和/或第二节点主动上报各自的候选资源信息，例如通过周期性上报，这样协作节点可以提前获得第一节点和第二节点的候选资源信息，为相应的发送或接收波束配置对应的资源，从而减小信令交互开销，减小时延，使得一个节点发送时另一个节点接收，便于应对双工匹配避免资源冲突。
在另一些实施例中，第一节点和/或第二节点可以响应协作节点的请求上报自己的候选资源信息。
示例性的，在协作节点获取第二信息之前，协作节点还可以执行以下操作：向第一节点发送第三请求信息，第三请求信息用于指示第一节点上报第一节点的候选资源信息；和/或向第二节点发送第四请求信息，第四请求信息用于指示第二节点上报第二节点的候选资源信息。
例如，当协作节点为第一节点时，协作节点获取第二信息之前，可以向第二节点发送第四请求信息，第四请求信息用于指示第二节点上报第二节点的候选资源信息。这种情况下，第一节点可以直接从自身获取第一节点的候选资源信息。
又如，当协作节点为第二节点时，协作节点获取第二信息之前，可以向第一节点发送第三请求信息，第三请求信息用于指示第一节点上报第一节点的候选资源信息。这种情况下，第二节点可以直接从自身获取第二节点的候选资源信息。
再如，当协作节点为第三节点时，协作节点获取第二信息之前，可以向第一节点发送第三请求信息，第三请求信息用于指示第一节点上报第一节点的候选资源信息；和/或，向第二节点发送第四请求信息，第四请求信息用于指示第二节点上报第二节点的候选资源信息。
对应的，在第一节点向协作节点发送第一节点的候选资源信息之前，第一节点接收协作节点的第三请求信息；和/或，在第二节点向协作节点发送第二节点的候选资源信息之前，第二节点接收协作节点的第四请求信息。
从而，第一节点和/或第二节点应协作节点的请求上报各自的候选资源信息。
上述的请求可以是协作节点获知有待发送的数据，从而触发请求信息的发送。对于第一节点和第二节点，该请求信息都是可选的，协作节点向第一节点和/或第二节点发送请 求消息，能够使得第一节点和/或第二节点依据协作节点的需求再上报相关信息，保证候选波束的信息发送的及时与有效。
上述第二信息可以和前文的第一信息一起获取，也可以与第一信息分别获取。协作节点为第三节点时，可以分别向第一节点和第二节点发送不同的请求信息请求候选资源信息，也可以向第一节点和第二节点发送相同内容的请求消息请求第一节点的候选资源信息和第二节点的候选资源信息，从而第一节点和第二节点分别响应该请求消息发送各自的和候选资源信息。
候选资源信息可以用于指示第一节点或第二节点的候选资源，例如时频资源、空间资源等。候选资源可以为第一节点或第二节点的可用资源或空闲资源，也可以为第一节点或第二节点的专用资源。候选资源的信息可以包括但不限于资源的索引、资源编号等。
协作节点获取第一节点和第二节点的候选资源信息，配置针对上述波束信息对应的资源，从而便于应对双工匹配，避免第三链路使用的资源与第一节点或第二节点其他链路上的资源产生冲突。
应理解，对于前述第一节点和/或第二节点向协作节点上报的候选波束的信息为候选波束的个数，协作节点为第一节点和第二节点配置相应发送或接收波束序列的情况，协作节点能够根据候选波束的个数更好的为第一节点和第二节点配置相应的资源，即可以为每个候选波束配置对应的接收资源、发送资源或反馈资源。
还应理解，对于第二节点的接收资源，可以由协作节点配置，也可以由接收端进行盲扫从而接收数据或信令。
在本申请实施例中，协作节点执行以下至少一项操作：向第一节点发送第一节点的发送资源信息；或者，向第二节点发送第二节点的接收资源信息；其中，第一节点的发送资源信息用于指示第一节点的发送波束的资源，第二节点的接收资源信息用于指示第二节点的接收波束的资源。
协作节点为第一节点和第二节点配置完相应资源后，即可以向第一节点和第二节点发送配置好的资源信息，从而避免资源冲突。
在本申请实施例中，协作节点还可以获取第三信息，第三信息包括第一节点与第二节点间的距离信息、第一节点在第一链路的天线增益信息、第二节点在第二链路的天线增益信息、协作节点预测的第三链路的路损信息中的至少一项，其中第三链路是第一节点与第二节点之间用于通信的链路；协作节点根据第三信息，确定第一节点的发送功率。
对应的，第一节点向协作节点发送第一节点在第一链路的天线增益信息，和/或，第二节点向协作节点发送第二节点在第二链路的天线增益信息，用于确定第一节点在第三链路的发送功率。
上述第三信息中从第一节点和/或第二节点处获取的信息也可以和前述的第一信息、第二信息以同样的方式一起获取，过程不再赘述。
具体的，协作节点根据第三链路的距离、协作节点对于第三链路的路损信息的预测、第一节点和/或第二节点对于第三链路的发送或接收天线增益，确定第三链路的发送功率。
在本申请实施例中，当协作节点是第二节点或第三节点时，协作节点向第一节点发送第一节点的发送功率信息，第一节点的发送功率信息用于指示第一节点的发送功率。
对应的，第一节点接收来自协作节点的发送功率信息，以相应的功率进行数据传输。
协作节点在根据第三信息配置完第一节点的发送功率之后，即可以向第一节点发送功率信息，使得第一节点能够以合适的功率向第二节点发送数据。
当发送功率过大时，可能会对其他正常通信链路产生干扰；当发送功率较小时，在数据传输时可能需要进一步增加发送功率。
当协作节点是第一节点时，协作节点为自己配置发送功率，从而以合适的功率向第二节点发送数据。
在本申请实施例中，协作节点还可以确定第二节点的反馈资源信息，第二节点的反馈资源信息用于指示第二节点的反馈资源，其中反馈资源用于向协作节点反馈第一节点与第二节点间波束的配对状态、第一节点与第二节点间的数据传输状态和第一节点与第二节点间信道的质量中的至少一项。
在本申请实施例中，第二节点的反馈资源信息可以是根据协作节点获取的第四信息确定的，第四信息包括第二节点的候选资源信息和第二节点的接收波束的资源、第二节点的接收波束信息中的至少一项。
对应的，第二节点向协作节点发送第四信息，用于协作节点确定第二节点的反馈资源信息，第二节点的反馈资源信息用于指示第二节点的反馈资源，其中反馈资源用于向协作节点反馈第一节点与第二节点间波束的配对状态、第一节点与第二节点间的数据传输状态和第一节点与第二节点间信道的质量中的至少一项。
反馈资源可以由协作节点发送反馈资源信息指示给第二节点，也可以通过预定义或预配置的方式由第二节点确定，如预配置每个收或收发波束和其对应的测量反馈的反馈资源。
第二节点发送的反馈信息可以还可以包括波束索引或波束对索引，当反馈的波束或波束对不止一个或一对时，针对不同的波束或波束对反馈，使得协作节点能将反馈信息与波束或波束对对应。
应理解，此处当协作节点是第二节点时，第二节点可以从自身获取第四信息，无需发送过程。
上述第四信息的传递与前述第一、第二、第三信息的传递方式可以类似，也可以复合于其他信息进行传递，此处不再赘述。
关于反馈波束配对状态，例如通过向协作节点反馈ACK/NACK作为波束配对状态的反馈，既可以对一个波束或一对波束进行反馈，也可以针对多波束分别反馈，例如发送波束为Tx0，接收波束分别为Rx0、Rx1、Rx2，第三链路的接收节点可以分别针对Tx0-Rx0、Tx0-Rx1、Tx0-Rx2进行反馈，此时，反馈内容可以包含波束配对状态和相应的波束对索引，当一个接收波束仅对应一个发送波束时，反馈内容可以仅包括接收波束的索引，从而协作节点能够获知对应于每个波束对的配对情况，索引也可以是其他能够区分各个波束的参数。
当一对发送/接收波束配对失败时，协作节点即能够收到针对该波束的NACK反馈，待建立链路节点可以从协作节点配对的其他波束对重新选择确定为第三链路的波束对，并针对该链路新的波束对进行反馈。若协作节点只配置了一对收发波束对，接收到NACK反馈还可以触发协作节点重新为第一节点和/或第二节点进行波束配置。
关于对第三链路上的数据传输状态的反馈，也可以通过ACK/NACK反馈。
关于针对第三链路信道质量的反馈，第一节点或第二节点可以使用协作节点配置的发 送或接收波束，以相应的发送功率进行传输。
在一些实施例中，可以先进行参考信号或导频信号的传输，之后向协作节点反馈例如参考信号接收功率(reference signal received power，RSRP)、信号干扰噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio，SINR)等描述信道质量的参数。
在另一些实施例中，对于时延敏感类业务，在协作节点将为待建立链路节点配置的发送/接收波束发送给相应的节点时，可能将需要传输的数据同时在该波束上传输。相比于针对普通业务，需要第一节点或第二节点先反馈对于导频信号的配对状况和信道质量，再进行数据传输的过程，能够大大减少数据传输的时间。数据传输完成后，第一节点或第二节点可以直接针对该数据进行反馈，反馈ACK/NACK和信道质量。若协作节点收到针对该数据的NACK反馈，则触发对该数据进行重传。
在第一节点或第二节点向协作节点反馈波束配对结果和信道质量之前，协作节点还可以根据新建立链路节点的可用资源、数据发送/接收资源、控制发送/接收资源确定其反馈波束配对结果和信道质量的资源，第一节点或第二节点即可以在相应的资源上向协作节点反馈。
在本申请实施例中，当协作节点确定的是第三链路上的发送波束序列和接收波束序列时，第一节点和第二节点可以依据协作节点的指示进行波束扫描，之后选取通信质量较高的波束对进行数据传输。因此，以上协作节点配置的发送功率、反馈资源、反馈内容、发送波束的资源、接收波束的资源也适用于这种情况。
在本申请实施例中，协作节点执行以下至少一项操作：协作节点向第一节点发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息包括第一节点的波束信息；或者，协作节点向第二节点发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息包括第二节点的波束信息。
可以理解的是，上述协作节点对于为第一节点和/或第二节点配置的波束信息、资源信息、反馈资源信息、发送功率信息的发送可以由协作节点在同一条信令中发送，例如，包含在前述的第一指令信息、第二指令信息，也可以分别传送，本申请对信息以何种形式发送不做限定。
上述实施例对第一链路、第二链路和第三链路的数据传输方式不做限定。针对于某特定数据的传输，上述第一节点、第二节点、第三节点组成的系统可以包括信源节点、中继节点、信宿节点。对于信源节点-中继节点链路，信源节点是数据的发送节点，中继节点是数据的接收节点。对于中继节点-信宿节点链路，中继节点是数据的发送节点，信宿节点是数据的接收节点。对于信源节点-信宿节点链路，信源节点是数据的发送节点，信宿节点是数据的接收节点。
协作节点可以为上述信源节点、中继节点、信宿节点的任一节点。
图4是本申请实施例提供的波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
方法400将协作节点确定为第三节点，以第一节点为第三链路上的发送节点为例从信令交互的角度介绍对应于图2的技术方案，第二节点为第三链路上的发送节点的情况类似，方法400包括以下步骤：
S422，第一节点向第三节点发送第一节点候选波束的信息。
S424，第二节点向第三节点发送第二节点候选波束的信息。
第一节点通过第一链路向第三节点发送第一节点的候选波束信息，第二节点通过第二 链路向第三节点发送第二节点的候选波束信息，对应的，第三节点可以通过第一链路获取第一节点的候选波束的信息，通过第二链路获取第二节点的候选波束的信息。
候选波束的信息可以为候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度或者为如前所述能够标识特定波束的其他参数，也可以为候选波束的个数。
S440，第三节点确定第一节点和第二节点的波束信息。第一节点的波束信息可以为第一节点的发送波束的索引和/或第一节点的发送波束的索引对应角度或其他能够标识特定波束的其他参数，也可以为第一节点的发送波束序列。
第二节点的波束信息可以为第二节点的接收波束的索引和/或第二节点的接收波束索引对应角度或其他能够标识特定波束的其他参数，也可以为第二节点的接收波束序列。
当候选波束的信息为波束的索引和/或波束的索引对应角度时，协作节点可以从候选波束中确定第一节点的发送波束信息，第二节点的接收波束信息。
当候选波束的信息为候选波束的个数时，协作节点可以确定第一节点和第二节点的波束序列。
当候选波束的信息为波束的索引和/或波束的索引对应角度时，候选波束的信息还可以包括第一子信息和/或第二子信息。
第一子信息包括第一链路的方向、第一链路的距离、第二链路的方向以及第二链路的距离，第二子信息包括第一节点的位置信息和第二节点的位置信息。
如前所述，协作节点可以依据候选波束的信息和第一子信息确定波束信息或波束序列，或者依据候选波束的信息和第二子信息确定波束信息或波束序列。
协作节点依据确定波束信息或波束序列的过程前文已经详细叙述，此处不再赘述。
在本申请实施例中，协作节点和第一节点和/或第二节点之间交互的信息中，包括很多角度、位置等与坐标系相关的信息。因此，协作节点能够灵活有效的配置相关信息需要协作节点能够与第一节点和/或第二节点对接收到的与坐标系相关的信息有同样的理解。
当第一节点和/或第二节点处于使用相同的坐标系时，能够满足上述理解相同的条件，无论该相同的坐标系为GCS还是LCS。
而当协作节点与第一节点和/或第二节点之间使用的坐标系不同时，在进行波束信息的确定之前，需要进行坐标系转换的过程。
在本申请实施例中，在第一节点、第二节点向第三节点发送候选波束的信息之前，第三节点还可以通过第一链路向第一节点发送第一请求信息和/或通过第二链路向第二节点发送第二请求信息，用于请求两个节点的候选波束的信息。
S412，第三节点向第一节点发送第一请求信息。
S414，第三节点向第二节点发送第二请求信息。
两个节点的作用是等同的，因此消息的先后顺序并不限定，也可以同时发送。
第一请求信息用于请求第一节点的候选波束的信息；第二请求信息用于请求第二节点的候选波束的信息。
S432，第一节点向第三节点发送第一节点的候选资源信息。
S434，第二节点向第三节点发送第二节点的候选资源信息。
该候选资源信息可以为时频资源的信息，如时频资源的索引等，用于传输上述第三节点为第一节点和第二节点配置的波束。
在一些实施例中，候选资源信息的发送可以基于第三节点的请求，例如第三节点分别向第一节点发送第三请求信息、第四请求信息。
第三节点也可以在第一请求信息、第二请求信息中包括对于第一节点、第二节点的候选资源信息的请求。
在另一些实施例中，第一节点、第二节点主动向第三节点主动上报各自的候选资源信息，例如可以周期性地向第三节点上报候选资源信息。
第三节点可以基于第一节点和第二节点的候选资源信息，确定第一节点和第二节点的发送或接收波束对应的资源，第二节点的反馈资源，用于反馈链路情况，如波束配对状态、信道质量等。
S452，第三节点向第一节点发送第一节点的波束信息。
S454，第三节点向第二节点发送第二节点的波束信息。
在上述步骤S440第三节点确定波束信息之后，即可以将第一节点的波束信息通过第一链路发送给第一节点，将第二节点的波束信息通过第二链路发送给第二节点。
从而第一节点和第二节点可以使用接收的第三节点发送的波束信息，使用对应波束信息指示的波束或波束序列进行数据传输或进一步进行波束扫描。
S462，第三节点向第一节点发送第一节点的资源信息。
S464，第三节点向第二节点发送第二节点的资源信息。
S470，第三节点向第一节点发送第一节点的发送功率。
当波束信息为波束的索引和/或波束的索引对应角度时，第一节点和第二节点的资源信息即为第一节点和第二节点最终从波束信息中确定的通信波束信息对应的波束的资源。当波束信息为波束序列时，第一节点和第二节点的资源信息为第一节点和第二节点按照相应的波数序列进行扫描后最终确定的通信波束对对应的资源。为了使得第一节点和第二节点通信时，一个节点发送时，另一个节点接收，第一节点和第二节点的资源可以为一样的时频资源。
第一节点还可以从通过第一链路向第三节点发送第一节点在第一链路的天线增益信息，第二节点也可以通过第二链路向第三节点发送第二节点在第二链路的天线增益信息。第三节点还可以对第三链路的路损情况进行预测，结合第一节点与第二节点之间的距离，确定第一节点的发送功率，并将该发送功率发送给第一节点。
S480，第二节点向第三节点发送反馈信息。
第二节点向第三节点反馈信息的内容可以由第三节点确定，包括但不限于波束配对状态、数据传输状态、信道质量等。
图4仅示出了协作节点是第三节点的情况，当协作节点是第一节点或第二节点时，以协作节点是第一节点为例，对于上述各种信息的传递，第一节点仅需要知道第二节点的候选波束的信息和候选资源信息。
对于第一子信息、第二子信息的上报，可以采用长周期上报和动态微更新，从而减小上报开销。
而且由于第一节点和第二节点之间没有直接的链路，第一节点获取第二节点的相关信息需要通过第三节点中继转发，从而完成整个流程。
图4中各个节点如果使用不同的坐标系，在相关信息的传递过程中需要如前文所述经 过坐标转换的步骤，相关内容可以参考前文的叙述，此处为简洁，不进行详细介绍。
应理解，无论对于图4还是之后的图5至图12中的方法流程图，步骤的标号不意味着对执行顺序的限定，各个步骤直接可以以内在逻辑执行，不限于按照本申请流程图的标号顺序执行。
为进一步理解本申请的技术方案，下面结合图5至图10以具体的实施例对本申请的技术方案进行详细介绍。
图5示出了本申请实施例提供的一种波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
第三节点与第二节点之间的链路为第二链路，第三节点同时和第一节点之间有建立好的第一链路，随着第二节点的移动，第二节点移动到第一节点的信号覆盖范围，第三节点即可以根据第一节点和第二节点的位置和接收到超高可靠与低延时通信(ultra-reliable and low latency communications，URLLC)业务，触发第一节点和第二节点建立链路，从而提高时延敏感类业务数据的快速辅助传输提高可靠性。
方法500中第三节点可以为信源节点，也是协作节点，第二节点可以为信宿节点，第一节点可以为中继节点，信源节点与中继节点之间的链路为第一链路，信源节点与信宿节点之间的链路为第二链路，中继节点与信宿节点之间是待建立或待确定波束的第三链路。
方法500的技术方案，信源节点通过获取中继节点和信宿节点候选波束的索引和/或信宿节点候选波束的索引对应角度为其配置发送和接收波束的索引和/或角度，从而降低中继节点和信宿节点进行通信时波束扫描范围，降低开销和时延。
S510，信源节点确定第三链路的距离和方向。
在本申请实施例中，方向可以为链路与某一坐标系下例如正北方向的夹角，或者通过两条链路的方向可以确定该两条链路之间的夹角，再结合两条链路的距离，从而能够确定待建立链路或待确定波束链路的与该两条链路之间的夹角，从而进一步得出待建立链路的方向(或者波束的方向)。
或者，信源节点可以依据中继节点和信宿节点的位置信息获取第三链路的方向。该位置信息可以是相对坐标或绝对坐标，根据几何关系，即可以获取第三链路的方向。
S520，信源节点触发第三链路的波束配置。
在S520中，信源节点根据第三链路的距离小于预设阈值，确定触发第三链路的波束配置。
S532，信源节点向信宿节点请求候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度。
S534，信源节点向中继节点请求候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度。
在S532和S534中，信源节点还可以向信宿节点和中继节点请求候选资源信息。候选资源信息包括中继节点和信宿节点的可用时频资源等。
具体的，对于中继节点，由于在第三链路的数据传输中的作用是发送，信源节点请求的中继节点的候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度是用于中继节点向信宿节点发送数据；而信宿节点的候选波束的索引和/或信宿节点的候选波束的索引对应角度是用于信宿节点从中继节点接收数据。
信源节点可以仅请求信宿或中继节点一定角度范围或地理位置范围的候选波束索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度，从而减小两个节点上报开销和自己的协调开销。
S532和S534为可选的步骤，即信源节点作为协作节点请求候选波束的索引和/或候选 波束的索引对应角度这一步骤不是必须存在的，中继节点、信宿节点可以周期性向信源节点上报候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度减小信源节点发送请求消息的开销和时延，也可以由信源节点提前向中继节点和信宿节点请求候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度从而减小时延。这样当有时延敏感性数据需要传输时，信源节点作为协作节点可以基于已经上报的波束配置参数直接进行波束配置，而无需再进行相关信息上报的过程，减小时延，提高数据传输效率。
S542，信宿节点向信源节点反馈候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度。
S544，中继节点向信源节点反馈候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度。
在S542和S544中，该步骤中的反馈即分别是对S532、S534的请求的反馈。
S552，信源节点信宿节点发送信宿节点的接收波束的索引和/或信宿节点的接收波束的索引对应角度。
S554，信源节点中继节点发送中继节点的发送波束的索引和/或中继节点的发送波束的索引对应角度。
S560，中继节点、信宿节点进行数据传输；
S570，信宿节点向信源节点发送反馈信息。
反馈信息可以包括对波束配对的ACK/NACK反馈从而反馈波束配对是否成功，还可以包括数据传输的ACK/NACK反馈从而反馈数据传输是否成功，还可以包括描述信道质量的参数反馈，当信源节点配置的发送/接收波束仅有一对时，在收到NACK反馈或信噪比低于一定阈值，可以触发信源节点重新进行波束配置。
图6是对应于图5所示方法的时延示意图。
图6进一步从时间顺序描述了如图5场景下信源节点作为协作节点辅助第三链路建立并通过信源-信宿链路和信源-中继-信宿链路进行数据传输的过程。
如图6所示，t0-t1时刻：信源节点同时向中继节点、信宿节点进行数据传送和配置信息传送，配置信息包括第三链路的发送/接收波束及其对应发送/接收资源、发送功率、反馈资源等。
应理解，由于协作节点是信源节点，信源节点能够知道具体需要发送数据的时间，从而在此之前已经根据第一链路、第二链路状态和中继节点、信宿节点的候选波束的信息、候选资源信息对第三链路对应的收发波束及其对应时频资源、发送功率、反馈资源进行了配置，从而在需要进行数据传输时，直接将数据及配置信息发送给中继节点、信宿节点，即为t0-t1时间段。
对于信源-信宿链路，信宿节点接收到波束配置信息和数据并进行处理，包括物理层处理和高层处理，处理时间为Δ1时间段。在此链路的Δ1时间段，信宿节点已经根据信源节点的配置确定了中继节点-信宿节点链路的接收波束，从而在之后的中继节点-信宿节点链路直接接收数据进行处理。
对于信源-中继-信宿链路，中继节点接收来自信源节点的波束配置信息和数据进行轻度处理，如图中Δ2时间段所示。
在轻度处理之后，中继节点即可以将数据转发至信宿节点，转发方式可以为译码转发、解调转发或者软转发甚至仅进行放大转发，在相应的配置波束上进行转发，转发所用的资源可以为信源节点配置的，转发方式的选择也可以为协作节点配置，转发步骤所用时间段 为t1+Δ2-t2。
信宿节点接收到数据后，即可以如信源节点-信宿节点链路一样，对数据进行处理，包括物理层处理和高层处理，时间同样为Δ1。
由时延图可以看出，对于数据传输的两条传输路径：信源-信宿链路和信源-中继-信宿链路，信源节点辅助中继节点和信宿节点之间链路的快速建立，从而数据经过中继节点传输至信宿节点时，时延小，保证时延敏感数据的可靠传输。
可以理解的是，图6所示的时延图是针对信源节点辅助中继-信宿链路确定波束信息并进行数据传输的过程，在协作节点是其他节点、第一节点和第二节点有其他的功能的时候，例如图7、图8、图10、图12的场景或者其他未示出的实施例，通过协作节点辅助第一节点和/或第二节点配置波束信息或其他配置信息，也可以实现类似减小时延的效果，具体可以结合其他实施例分析得到，为简洁，此处不再赘述。
图7示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
在方法700中，第一节点可以为信源节点，也是协作节点，第三节点是中继节点，第二节点为信宿节点，信源节点与中继节点之间的链路为第一链路，中继节点与信宿节点之间的链路为第二链路，信源节点与信宿节点之间是待建立或待确定波束的第三链路。信源节点使用GCS，中继节点、信宿节点分别使用LCS3、LCS2。
与方法500不同，方法700对应的实施例三个节点使用的坐标系不同，需要进行坐标系转换的过程，且由于信源节点与信宿节点之间没有直连的链路，部分信宿节点的信息需要通过中继节点转发给信源节点。
S710，中继节点向信源节点发送第二链路波束信息。
在S710中，中继节点动态或半静态将第二链路中中继节点的发送波束的索引对应角度和第二链路的距离发送给信源节点，为了降低中继节点的开销，对于距离的上报可以包括长周期的距离上报和动态的距离微更新。
S720，信源节点确定第三链路距离和方向。
由于信源节点已知第一链路中信源节点的发送波束方向，即为第一链路方向，也容易获得第一链路的距离，又能通过中继节点获知第二链路的方向和距离，即能够根据几何关系确定第三链路的方向(或波束的方向)、第三链路的距离。
信源节点也可以通过中继节点获取信宿节点的位置信息，从而获取第三链路的方向和距离。
S730，信源节点触发第三链路的波束配置。
信源节点根据第三距离小于门限值，确定触发波束配置。
S740，信源节点通过中继节点向信宿节点请求候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度。
在S740中，由于第三链路未建立，信源节点和信宿节点没有直接信息传递的通道，需要通过中继节点进行信息的传递。
同方法500中一样，该请求的步骤不是必须存在，在传输时延敏感如URLLC业务时，信宿节点可以中继节点周期性向信源节点上报候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度以减小信源节点发送请求消息的开销和时延，也可以由信源节点提前通过中继节点向信宿节点请求候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度从而减小时延。
S750，信宿节点通过中继节点向信源节点反馈候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度。
在S750中，反馈的消息包括候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度。
若在S740中信源节点可以仅请求一定角度范围内的候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度，信宿节点即按照信源节点的要求反馈对应角度范围的候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度，从而降低信宿节点的上报开销和信源节点的协调开销。
由于中继节点、信宿节点均使用局部坐标系，信宿节点即将处于其局部坐标系LCS3下的波束的索引及其对应角度集合通过中继节点发送给信源节点。
S760，信源节点进行LCS3-GCS坐标变换。
在S760中，信源节点接收到的是波束的索引和/或波束的索引对应角度集合，信源节点可以保留波束的索引，将LCS3下的角度转换成GCS下的角度，再依据该波束角度选择和第三链路的方向接近的波束作为信宿节点的若干接收波束，之后将选中的波束对应索引发送到信宿节点。在本申请具体实施例中，坐标转换可以利用如矩阵等工具进行。
信源节点还为自己配置用于与信宿节点通信的发送波束。
S770，信源节点通过中继节点向信宿节点发送波束的索引和/或波束的对应角度。
将发送或接收波束配置信息发送给信宿节点可以是将波束的索引或该索引对应于LCS3下的角度发送给信宿节点。即信源节点可以将配置好的GCS下的波束信息再转换为LCS3下的波束信息，再发送给信宿节点。
或者在具体情况下，由于S770中信源节点已将信宿节点在LCS3下的波束信息转换成GCS下的波束信息，因此能够根据信源节点-信宿节点链路的距离和方向配置信源节点、信宿节点的发送/接收波束，最终确定好信宿节点的接收波束后，仅需将对应角度的波束的索引发送给信宿节点即完成波束配置。
信源节点也可以根据为信宿节点配置的波束和自身所使用的发送波束，为第三链路配置收发波束的顺序。
此外，对于第三链路，信源节点还可以为第三链路配置发送或接收波束对应的时频资源、发送功率、反馈资源。
S780，信源节点、信宿节点进行数据传输。
信源节点用配置的发送功率，在发送资源上使用发送波束的索引对应的发送波束发送数据，信宿节点在对应的接收资源，使用接收波束的索引对应的接收波束接收数据。当发送波束或接收波束不止一个时，中继节点、信宿节点既可以用该不止一个波束进行数据传输，例如，一个发送波束对应多个接收波束，多个发送波束对应一个接收波束，多个发送对应多个接收波束，也可以根据一定标准在配置的发送/接收的波束中选择出较优的波束配对方案。
S790，信宿节点向信源节点发送反馈信息。
信宿节点可以在反馈资源上进行对新建第三链路的反馈，即在配对状态反馈资源反馈波束配对是否成功，例如反馈ACK/NACK，在测量反馈资源反馈第三链路的信道质量，如参考信号接收功率、信噪比等。
反馈可以是针对参考信号的反馈，对于信源节点配置的发送/接收波束不止一对时，例如，一个发送波束对应多个接收波束，信宿节点可以对多个接收波束分别反馈，可以之 后选择信道质量较好的一个或多个接收波束进行数据传输。信宿节点也可以直接针对要传输的数据进行反馈。
当信源节点配置的发送/接收波束仅有一对时，在收到NACK反馈或信噪比低于一定阈值，可以触发信源节点重新进行波束配置。
图7示出了信源节点辅助信源-信宿链路的确定波束信息从而进行数据传输的过程。图7中协作节点和协作节点需要配置的信宿节点所使用的坐标系不同，即协作节点使用GCS，而信宿节点使用LCS2时，协作节点将信宿节点的信息统一转换成GCS下的信息再进行配置，并发送转换回LCS2的波束信息给信宿节点。
在一些实施例中，信源节点也可以将自己的坐标系转换成LCS2的坐标系再进行波束信息的配置，从而直接将LCS2下的波束信息发送给信宿节点。
此外，对于信源节点使用LCS。而信宿节点使用GCS也可以按照类似的坐标转换过程进行波束信息或其他信息的配置。除了图7的场景，对于本申请实施例示出的图5、图6、图8、图10、图12等的场景或其他本申请未示出但可以采用本申请技术方案的场景也可以进行类似的坐标转换从而进行波束信息或其他信息的配置。
图8是本申请实施例提供的又一种波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
图8示出了本申请另一个具体实施例的波束配置方法800的示意性流程图。
方法800中第三节点是中继节点，也是协作节点，第一节点是信源节点，第二节点是信宿节点，信源节点与中继节点之间的链路为第一链路，中继节点与信宿节点之间的链路为第二链路，信源节点与信宿节点之间是待建立的第三链路。
与方法500和方法700中协作节点获取候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度，配置发送或接收波束的索引和/或发送或接收波束索引对应角度不同，方法800中协作节点获取候选波束的个数，从而配置发送或接收波束序列，减小波束扫描开销和时延
S810，中继节点获取信源节点的第一位置信息、信宿节点的第二位置信息。
在S810中，中继节点获取信源节点、信宿节点的位置信息可以是依据中继节点与该两个节点之间的已建立链路信息确定。位置信息可以以坐标形式表示，可以是绝对位置信息，也可以是相对位置信息。为了进一步减少开销，方法800的实现可以在三个节点组成的系统所在区域范围内建立一个网格化的坐标系，该坐标系可以是基于全局坐标系而建立的，也可以是三个节点共同使用的局部坐标系而建立。和使用绝对位置相比，使用区域网格的相对位置可以仅需对该网格范围内的区域进行量化，减少了节点存储相关信息和发送消息的开销。
S820，中继节点将第一位置信息发送给信宿节点，将第二位置信息发送给信源节点。
S832，信宿节点确定信宿节点用于第三链路的候选接收波束。
S834，信源节点确定信源节点用于第三链路的候选发送波束。
信源节点能够根据自己的位置信息和信宿节点的位置信息，确定第三链路的方向，从而确定数个候选波束。
信宿节点能够根据自己的位置信息和信源节点的位置信息，确定第三链路的方向，从而确定数个候选波束。
S842，信宿节点向中继节点发送信宿节点的候选波束的个数。
S844，信源节点向中继节点发送信源节点的候选波束的个数。
在S842和S844中，候选波束的个数可以是依据中继节点请求而发送的，信源节点和信宿节点可以将确定的候选波束的个数发送给中继节点，信源节点的候选波束的个数是信源节点根据自己和信宿节点的位置确定的；信宿节点的候选波数的个数信息是节点根据自己和信源节点的位置确定的。
中继节点还可以为信源节点和信宿节点配置其他信息，可以包括信源节点的发送资源、发送功率，信宿节点的接收资源、反馈资源、反馈内容等。
S852，中继节点向和信宿节点发送信宿节点的接收波束序列。
S854，中继节点向信源节点发送信源节点的发送波束序列。
中继节点还可以将为第三链路的两个节点配置上述的其他信息发送给两个节点。
在S852和S852中，中继节点可以根据信源节点和信宿节点的候选波束的个数，为信源节点和信宿节点配置发送和接收波束序列。从而信源节点和信宿节点可以互相轮询波束，通过遍历波束组合，可以选择到具有较高传输质量的波束对。
S860，信源节点、信宿节点进行数据传输。
信源节点和信宿节点选择较高通信质量的波束对后，即可以进行数据传输。
S870，信宿节点向中继节点发送反馈信息。
具体反馈方式及内容如前实施例。若中继节点收到反馈NACK，可以触发信源节点、信宿节点重新配置发送/接收波束，且中继节点重新配置其他相关资源。
在方法800中，由第三链路节点自己确定相应的候选波束，而可以由协作节点配置其他如发送功率、收发资源和反馈资源。实际上，其他如发送功率、收发资源和反馈资源的配置也可以由第三链路节点自己配置，如此，协作节点仅可以只起到辅助信源节点和信宿节点信息传递的过程，即便于信源节点和信宿节点候选资源信息和其他信息的交互。
图9示出了对应于图8所示方法的时延示意图。
图9进一步从时间顺序描述了中继节点作为协作节点辅助信源-信宿链路建立并通过信源-信宿和信源-中继-信宿链路进行数据传输的过程。
对于信源-中继-信宿链路，在t0-t1时间段，信源节点向中继节点发送控制信令和数据。在此之前，协作节点中继节点已经根据与信源节点、信宿节点的交互确定了信源节点-信宿节点链路的发送/接收波束序列。
Δ2时间段：信宿节点接收来自中继节点的配置信息。
t1+Δ2-t2：中继节点向信宿节点发送数据。
对应的，信宿节点接收中继节点发送的数据，该数据是中继节点从信源节点接收到的，并且可以基于Δ2时间段信宿节点接收到的中继节点的配置信息，接收该数据。
Δ1时间段：信宿节点接收数据的处理时间，包括物理层处理和高层处理时间。
Δ3时间段：信源节点接收来自中继节点的配置信息。
Δ2时间段和Δ3时间段，中继节点可以在不同的时频资源上分别向信宿、信源节点发送配置信息用于信源-信宿链路。
对于信源节点-信宿节点链路，由于在Δ2和Δ3时间段中继节点已经为该链路配置相关信息，在Δ3结束之后，即在t1+Δ2+Δ3-t3时间段，信源节点向信宿节点发送数据，之后在Δ1时间段，信宿节点对从信源节点直接接收的信息进行处理。
图10示出了本申请实施例提供的波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
方法1000中第二节点是协作节点，也是信宿节点，第三节点为信源节点(图中未示出)，第一节点为中继节点，信源节点与中继节点之间的链路为第一链路，信源节点与信宿节点之间的链路为第二链路，中继节点与信宿节点之间是待建立的第三链路。
方法1000的技术方案协作节点通过中继节点的位置信息，确定中继节点和协作节点自身的发送和接收波束的索引和/或角度。
S1010，信宿节点获取中继节点的位置信息。
位置信息可以是坐标，也可以是地理位置范围如坐标范围。
中继节点的位置信息可以通过信源节点发送给信宿节点，信宿节点获取了中继节点的位置信息后可以结合信宿节点自己的位置信息确定第三链路的距离和方向。若链路距离小于一定阈值，即可以触发第三链路的建立。
S1020，信宿节点通过信源节点向中继节点请求候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度。
S1020不是必需的步骤，中继节点也可以周期性通过信源节点向信宿节点反馈候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度。
S1030，中继节点通过信源节点向信宿节点反馈候选波束的索引和/或候选波束的索引对应角度。
反馈信息即针对S1020中请求信息的反馈。
S1040，信宿节点通过信源节点向中继节点发送中继节点的发送波束的索引和/或发送波束的索引对应角度。
在S1040中，信宿节点为自己配置接收波束的索引和/或接收波束的索引对应角度，还可以配置其他信息，可以包括中继节点的发送功率、时频资源，信宿节点的时频资源、反馈资源及内容等。
S1050，信宿节点和中继节点进行数据传输。
信宿节点自己作为数据接收方，还可以根据波束配对情况和信道质量的测量，在信道质量过差或波束配对无法成功时，触发重新进行波束配置。
本申请还提供了另一个技术方案以实现本申请的技术效果，下面结合图11至图12对该技术方案进行详细介绍。
图11示出了本申请实施例提供的一种波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
图11示出的方法1100可以包括步骤S1110和S1120，下面结合附图对各个步骤进行详细介绍。
S1110，第一节点获取第二节点的位置信息。
在本申请实施例中，第一节点和第二节点之间没有直达链路，可以通过其他节点，例如第一节点通过第三节点获取第二节点的位置信息，其中第三节点和第一节点之间的链路为第一链路，第三节点和第二节点之间的链路为第二链路。
在一些实施例中，第一节点通过第一链路从第三节点处获取第二节点的位置信息，第三节点根据与第二节点之间第二链路的参数，如发送波束和链路距离可以确定第二节点的位置信息。确定链路距离的方式前文已经给出，此处不再赘述。
在另一些实施例中，第一节点通过第一链路和第二链路获取来自第二节点的位置信息，即第二节点将自己的位置信息通过第三节点发送给第一节点。
第一节点能够获知自己的位置信息。
第一节点和第二节点的位置信息可以为第一节点和第二节点的坐标，可以为绝对坐标，也可以为相对坐标，可以为全局坐标系(global coordinate system，GCS)下的坐标，也可以为局部坐标系(local coordinate system，LCS)下的坐标。
在一些实施例中，位置信息可以为具体的坐标位置，例如经度和纬度坐标。
在另一些实施例中，位置信息可以为地理位置范围，例如坐标范围。
对于位置信息为坐标范围的实例已经在前文结合图3详细叙述，此处不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，第二节点或第三节点可以主动将第二节点的位置信息发送给第一节点。
例如，第二节点可以主动根据与第一节点建立链路的需求，通过第二链路和第一链路将位置信息发送给第一节点。
再如，第三节点能够获知第一节点和第二节点需要建立链路，主动依据第二链路的信息确定第二节点的位置信息，将其发送给第一节点。
在另一些实施例中，第一节点或第三节点还可以向第二节点或第三节点发送请求信息，用于请求第二节点的位置信息。
例如，第一节点需要确定第二节点的位置信息，从而通过第三节点向第二节点发送请求信息，请求第二节点的位置信息。
再如，第一节点需要确定第二节点的位置信息，直接向第三节点发送请求信息，请求第二节点的位置信息，从而第三节点可以根据自己与第二节点之间的第二链路信息，确定第二节点的位置信息，再通过第一链路发送给第一节点。
又如，第三节点能够知道第一节点需要第二节点的位置信息，例如，第三节点是数据的发送方，通过第一链路和第二链路向第一节点和第二节点发送数据，也能够获知第一节点和第二节点需要建立链路，从而提前向第二节点发送请求信息，请求第二节点的位置信息。
又如，第三节点知道第一节点需要第二节点的位置信息，从而直接根据自己与第二节点的链路信息确定第二节点的位置信息，将其发送给第一节点。
在本申请实施例中，第一节点还通过第三节点向第二节点转发第一节点的位置信息，第一节点的位置信息用于第二节点确定第二节点的波束信息。
在一些实施例中，第一节点主动通过第三节点向第二节点转发第一节点的位置信息。
第一节点主动将自己的位置信息发送给第二节点，从而能够减小第二节点与第一节点信令交互的开销。
可选的，可以由第三节点根据第一链路的信息确定第一节点的位置信息，将第一节点的位置信息发送给第二节点。
在另一些实施例中，第一节点接收第三节点发送的请求信息，用于指示第一节点上报第一地理位置范围对应的坐标。
可选的，第一节点接收由第三节点转发的第二节点发送的请求信息，用于指示第一节点上报第一地理范围对应的坐标。
第一节点依据请求信息，上报第一地理位置范围对应的坐标，可以在需要与第二节点建立链路时，及时上报自己的位置信息给第二节点，从而第二节点可以根据该位置信息配 置第二节点的波束信息，降低第二节点的波束扫描范围，减小时延和开销。
S1120，第一节点根据第一节点的位置信息、第二节点的位置信息和第一节点的候选波束的信息，确定第一节点的波束信息。
在本申请实施例中，第一节点的候选波束的信息可以为第一节点的候选波束的索引和/或第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度。
可选的，第一节点的候选波束的信息还可以包括波束编号、波束管理资源编号，上行信号资源号，下行信号资源号、侧行信号资源号、波束的绝对索引、波束的相对索引、波束的逻辑索引、波束对应的天线端口的索引、波束对应的天线端口组索引、波束对应的下行信号的索引、波束对应的下行同步信号块的时间索引、波束对连接(beam pair 1ink，BPL)信息、波束对应的发送参数(Tx parameter)、波束对应的接收参数(Rx parameter)、波束对应的发送权重、波束对应的权重矩阵、波束对应的权重向量、波束对应的接收权重、波束对应的发送权重的索引、波束对应的权重矩阵的索引、波束对应的权重向量的索引、波束对应的接收权重的索引、波束对应的接收码本、波束对应的发送码本、波束对应的接收码本的索引、波束对应的发送码本的索引中的至少一种。
在本申请实施例中，第一节点的候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中至少一项相关的信息。
在一些实施例中，第一节点的候选波束的信息可以包括第一节点全部波束的信息。
例如，不限定角度范围或角度范围为360°，从而第一节点或第二节点的候选波束的信息包括第一节点或第二节点的全部波束的信息或对应配置的最大波束个数的子集。
在另一些实施例中，第一节点的候选波束的信息可以包括第一节点的部分波束的信息。例如，第一节点的候选波束的信息包括一定角度范围或者地理位置范围的波束的信息。
上述角度可以为例如0-180°范围内的波束。地理位置也可以对应角度，例如第二节点的坐标或位置范围在第一节点的偏北方向，第一节点与第二节点通信时，可以仅选择北偏西90°至和北偏东90°共180°的角度范围内的波束作为候选波束。
在本申请实施例中，第一节点可以向所述第三节点发送所述第一节点的候选资源信息，所述第一节点的候选资源信息用于所述第三节点确定所述第一节点的发送或接收波束的时频资源和/或所述第一节点的反馈资源，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述第三节点反馈所述第三链路上的波束配对状态、所述第三链路上的数据传输状态或所述第三链路的信道质量中的至少一项。
对应的，第三节点接收第一节点发送的候选资源信息，从而根据第一节点的候选资源的信息确定第一节点的发送或接收波束的时频资源，若第一节点是第三链路的接收节点，还可以确定第一节点的反馈资源。
在一些实施例中，第一节点是第一节点和第二节点建立通信时的发送节点，第一节点的候选资源信息用于第三节点确定第一节点的发送波束的时频资源。
在另一些实施例中，第一节点是第一节点与第二节点建立通信时的接收节点，第一节点的候选资源信息用于第三节点确定第一节点的接收波束的时频资源和/或第一节点的反馈资源。
可选的，第三节点还可以确定第一节点的反馈内容，反馈内容包括第一节点和第二节点的波束配对情况、第三链路上的数据传输状态和第三链路的信道质量中至少一项。
上述反馈内容在前文已经详细介绍，此处不再赘述。
第三节点为第一节点配置收发波束的时频资源和/或反馈资源，能够应对双工匹配，避免资源的冲突。
在本申请实施例中，第一节点如果是第一节点和第二节点间的发送节点，第一节点还向所述第三节点发送所述第一节点在所述第一链路的天线增益信息，所述天线增益信息用于所述第三节点确定所述第一节点在所述第三链路上的发送功率。
对应的，第三节点接收第一节点在第一链路上的天线增益信息，该天线增益信息用于第三节点确定第一节点在第三链路上的发送功率。
第三节点还可以根据第三节点预测的第三链路上的路损信息，第二节点发送的第二节点在第二链路上的天线增益信息确定第三链路上的发送节点的发送功率。
从而第三节点可以灵活根据第三链路的信息确定发送功率，避免功率过大时影响其他链路通信，功率过小影响通信质量需要逐渐增加。
第三节点可以在配置完第一节点的发送功率后，即可以将发送功率信息发送给第一节点，指示第一节点以相应的功率进行通信。
应理解，上述第一节点和/或第二节点子集配置波束信息的方案也可以使得第一节点和/或第二节点在较小的范围内进行波束扫描，节省其扫描开销，减小时延和能耗。
此外，由于在方法200中已经对坐标系转换的过程进行详细叙述，如果协作节点需要在为第一节点和/或第二节点配置其他信息的过程中进行坐标转换，坐标转换过程如前文所述，在方法1100和以下的具体实施例1200中都不再进行赘述。
在本申请实施例中，第三节点可以是信源节点或中继节点、信宿节点中的任意一个节点。
为了进一步理解方法1100，下面以图12介绍对应于方法1100的一个具体实施例。
图12示出了本申请实施例提供的一种波束配置方法的示意性流程图。
方法1200中第三节点是信源节点，也是协作节点，第一节点是中继节点，第二节点是信宿节点，中继节点与信源节点之间的链路为第一链路，信源节点与信宿节点之间的链路为第二链路，信宿节点与中继节点之间是待建立或待确定波束的第三链路。
S1210，信源节点获取中继节点、信宿节点的位置信息。
在S1210中，信源节点既可以直接依据信源节点与中继节点之间的第一链路的信息(链路方向、链路距离)直接确定中继节点的位置信息，也可以向中继节点发送请求信息，请求中继节点的位置信息。
信源节点获取信宿节点的位置信息的方式和获取中继节点的位置信息的方式类似，此处不再赘述。
中继节点和信宿节点的位置信息可以是坐标形式表示或地理位置范围或坐标位置范围标识，可以是绝对位置信息，也可以是相对位置信息。
S1222，信源节点将中继节点的位置信息发送给信宿节点。
S1222，信源节点将信宿节点的位置信息发送给中继节点。
在S1220中，中继节点在接收到信源节点的位置信息后，可以对位置信息进行进一步处理，以获取链路方向从而配置相应的发送/接收波束。
S1232，信宿节点确定自己的波束信息。
S1234，中继节点确定自己的波束信息。
在S1232和S1234中，信宿节点和中继节点的波束信息是根据信宿节点和中继节点的位置信息确定的。
示例性的，信宿节点根据自己的位置信息，中继节点的位置信息，自己的候选波束的信息，确定自己的接收波束信息。
中继节点根据自己的位置信息、信宿节点的位置信息，自己的候选波束的信息，确定自己的发送波束信息。
其中，波束信息可以为波束角度和/或波束索引，波束信息用于指示相应的波束。
S1240，中继节点和信宿节点进行数据传输。
S1250，信宿节点向信源节点发送反馈信息。
可选的，信源节点还可以为中继节点配置发送波束对应的时频资源、发送功率，为信宿节点配置接收波束对应的时频资源、反馈资源、反馈内容等。
具体反馈方式及内容如前实施例。若信源节点收到反馈NACK，可以触发信源节点重新配置发送/接收波束，且信源节点重新配置其他相关资源。
上文结合图1至图12详细的描述了本申请实施例的方法实施例，下面结合图13至图15，详细描述本申请实施例的装置实施例。应理解，方法实施例的描述与装置实施例的描述相互对应，因此，未详细描述的部分可以参见前面方法实施例。
图13示出了本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意性框图。
图13的装置用于实现对应于图2至图10的技术方案。
该装置1300应用于通信系统中，所述通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，所述装置为协作节点，所述协作节点是所述第一节点、所述第二节点和所述第三节点中的任一节点，所述装置包括：
收发单元1310，用于获取第一信息，所述第一信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的信息和所述第二节点的候选波束的信息；
处理单元1320，用于根据所述第一信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所述第二节点的波束信息，其中，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束，所述第二节点的波束信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束。
可选的，所述收发单元1310具体用于通过以下至少一种方式获取所述第一信息：接收所述第一节点上报的所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，接收所述第二节点上报的所述第二节点的候选波束的信息。
可选的，所述收发单元1310，还用于执行以下至少一项操作：向所述第一节点发送第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，向所述第二节点发送第二请求信息，所述第二请求信息用于指示所述第二节点上报所述第二节点的候选波束的信息。
可选的，所述候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中至少一项相关的信息。
可选的，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的索引、所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项；所述第二节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第二节点的候选波束的索引、所述第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第二节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
可选的，所述候选波束的个数是根据所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息确定的。
可选的，所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的发送波束序列；所述第二节点的波束信息包括所述第二节点的接收波束序列。
可选的，所述处理单元，具体用于，根据所述第一节点的候选波束的索引和所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项，确定所述第一节点的发送波束的索引和所述第一节点的发送波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；根据所述第二节点的候选波束的索引和所述第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项，确定所述第二节点的接收波束的索引和所述第二节点的接收波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项。
可选的，所述第一信息还包括第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项，所述第一子信息包括所述第一链路的方向、所述第一链路的距离、所述第二链路的方向以及所述第二链路的距离，所述第二子信息包括所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息；其中，所述第一链路是所述第一节点和所述第三节点之间的链路，所述第二链路是所述第二节点和所述第三节点之间的链路；所述处理单元1320具体用于：根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息；根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第二节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第二节点的波束信息。
可选的，根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项，确定所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的距离；当所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的距离小于预设阈值时，确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所述第二节点的波束信息。
可选的，所述收发单元1310，还用于获取第二信息，所述第二信息包括所述第一节点的候选资源信息和所述第二节点的候选资源信息；所述处理单元1320，还用于根据所述第二信息，确定所述第一节点的发送资源信息和所述第二节点的接收资源信息，所述第一节点的发送资源信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束的资源，所述第二节点的接收资源信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束的资源。
可选的，所述收发单元1310，还用于：向所述第一节点发送第一节点的发送资源信息；向所述第二节点发送所述第二节点的接收资源信息；其中，所述第一节点的发送资源信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束的资源，所述第二节点的接收资源信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束的资源。
可选的，所述收发单元1310，还用于获取第三信息，所述第三信息包括所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的距离信息、所述第一节点在所述第一链路的天线增益信息、所述第二节点在所述第二链路的天线增益信息、所述协作节点预测的第三链路的路损信息中的至少一项，其中所述第三链路是所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间用于通信的链路；所述处理单元1320，还用于根据所述第三信息，确定所述第一节点的发送功率。
可选的，当所述协作节点是所述第二节点或所述第三节点，所述收发单元，还用于向所述第一节点发送所述第一节点的发送功率信息，所述第一节点的发送功率信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送功率。
可选的，所述处理单元1320，还用于确定所述第二节点的反馈资源信息，所述第二节点的反馈资源信息用于指示所述第二节点的反馈资源，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述协 作节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
可选的，所述协作节点为所述第三节点，所述收发单元1310具体用于：直接从第一节点获取所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；直接从第二节点获取所述第二节点的候选波束的信息；或者，所述协作节点为所述第一节点或所述第二节点中的一者，所述收发单元1310具体用于：通过所述第三节点间接获取所述第一节点或所述第二节点中的另一者的候选波束的信息。
可选的，所述收发单元1310用于还用于执行以下至少一项操作：向所述第一节点发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括所述第一节点的波束信息；或者，向所述第二节点发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二节点的波束信息。
图14示出了本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意性框图。
图14的装置用于实现对应于图2至图10的技术方案。
该装置1400应用于通信系统中，所述通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，协作节点为所述第三节点或所述第二节点，所述装置为所述第一节点，所述装置包括：
收发单元1410，用于：
向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；
接收来自所述协作节点的第一节点的波束信息，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束或接收波束。
可选的，所述收发单元1410，还用于：接收所述协作节点发送的第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报所述第一节点的候选波束的信息。
可选的，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中的至少一项相关的信息。
可选的，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的索引、所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
可选的，所述第一节点的候选波束的个数是根据所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息确定的。
可选的，所述第二节点的位置信息是从所述协作节点接收的。
可选的，所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的波束的索引和所述第一节点的波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；或者，所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的波束序列。
可选的，所述第一节点的波束信息是根据第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第一节点的候选波束的信息确定的；其中，所述第一子信息包括所述第一链路的方向、所述第一链路的距离、所述第二链路的方向以及所述第二链路的距离，所述第二子信息包括所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息；所述第一链路是所述第一节点和所述第三节点之间的链路，所述第二链路是所述第二节点和所述第三节点之间的链路。
可选的，所述收发单元1410，还用于向所述协作节点发送第一节点的候选资源信息，所述第一节点的候选资源信息用于所述协作节点确定所述第一节点的发送波束或接收波束的时频资源和所述第一节点的反馈资源中的至少一项，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述协作节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节 点间的数据传输状态和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
可选的，所述收发单元1410，还用于接收来自所述协作节点的第一节点的资源信息，所述第一节点的资源信息包括所述第一节点的发送波束或接收波束的资源以及所述第一节点的反馈资源中的至少一项，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述协作节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
可选的，所述收发单元1410，还用于向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点在所述第一链路的天线增益信息，所述天线增益信息用于所述协作节点确定所述第一节点在第三链路上的发送功率；其中所述第三链路是所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间用于通信的链路。
可选的，所述第一节点是所述第一节点和所述第二节点之间的发送节点，所述收发单元1410，还用于接收来自所述协作节点的所述第一节点的发送功率信息，所述第一节点的发送功率信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送功率。
可选的，所述协作节点为所述第三节点，所述收发单元1410，具体用于：通过所述第一节点直接向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，所述协作节点为所述第二节点，所述收发单元1410，具体用于：通过所述三节点间接向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息。
图15示出了本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意性框图。
图15的装置用于实现对应于图11至图12的技术方案。
如图15所示，该装置为第一节点，该装置包括：
收发单元1510，用于获取第二节点的位置信息；
处理单元1520，用于根据所述第一节点的位置信息、所述第二节点的位置信息和所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送或接收波束。
本申请提供的技术方案中，第一节点根据第一节点的位置信息和获取的第二节点的位置信息，确定第一节点自身的波束信息，从而避免第一节点在与第二节点进行通信时，扫描全范围波束，减小波束扫描范围，降低开销和时延。
可选的，所述处理单元1520，具体用于，根据所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息，确定所述第三链路的方向；所述第一节点根据所述第一节点的候选波束的信息和所述第三链路的方向，确定所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，其中所述第三链路是所述第一节点与所述第二节点之间用于通信的链路。
该装置可以根据第一节点的位置信息和第二节点的位置信息，确定第三链路的方向，之后根据第三链路的方向在第一节点波束中选择与该方向接近的波束作为候选波束，减小波束扫描的范围，减小开销和时延。
可选的，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中至少一项相关的信息。
候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理位置范围中至少一项相关的信息意味着第一节点根据第二节点和第一节点的位置确定了全部波束信息或部分波束信息作为候选波束信息。当候选波束信息是部分波束信息时，第一节点可以在该部分波束信息中进一步确定其波束信息，减小波束扫描范围，降低开销和时延。
可选的，所述收发单元1510，具体用于，所述装置通过第三节点获取所述第二节点的位置信息。
由于第一节点和第二节点没有直接的链路，第一节点获取第二节点的位置信息需要通过第三节点，通过第三节点辅助第一节点和第二节点之间的信息传递，便于第一节点确定自己与第二节点通信的波束信息，降低扫描开销和时延。
可选的，所述收发单元1510，还用于，通过所述第三节点向所述第二节点转发所述第一节点的位置信息，所述第一节点的位置信息用于所述第二节点确定所述第二节点的波束信息。
第一节点还通过第三节点向第二节点转发第一节点的位置信息，从而第二节点也可以根据第一节点的位置信息确定自己的波束信息，降低第二节点与第一节点通信时的波束扫描的范围，降低时延和开销。
可选的，所述收发单元1510用于接收所述第三节点发送的第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报第一地理范围对应的坐标。
第一节点可以基于请求将第一地理范围对应的坐标通过第三节点发送给第二节点，从而在第一节点和第二节点需要通信时，第一节点及时应请求信息上报第一地理范围对应的坐标，第二节点及时据此确定自己的波束信息，减小波束扫描范围，降低时延和开销。
可选的，所述第二节点的位置信息包括所述第二节点的位置坐标和/或所述第二节点的地理位置范围。
第二节点的位置信息为坐标时，第一节点可以确定的候选波束的信息角度范围较小，第一节点可以在更小的范围内进行波束扫描；
第二节点的位置信息为地理位置范围时，第二节点上报该地理位置范围所需要的开销较小，从而减轻第二节点的开销，第一节点根据第二节点的地理位置范围进行波束扫描，降低第一节点的扫描开销和时延。
可选的，所述收发单元1510还用于，向所述第三节点发送所述第一节点的候选资源信息，所述第一节点的候选资源信息用于所述第三节点确定所述第一节点的发送或接收波束的时频资源和/或所述第一节点的反馈资源，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述第三节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间波束的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态或和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
第三节点可以通过第一节点的时频资源，结合第二节点的时频资源，为第一节点和第二节点配置通信波束对应的时频资源，以便于应对双工匹配，减少资源冲突。
可选的，所述收发单元1510，还用于接收来自所述第三节点的第一节点的资源信息，所述第一节点的资源信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送或接收波束的资源和/或所述第一节点的反馈资源，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述第三节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间波束的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态或和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
第三节点还可以为第一节点和第二节点之中的接收节点配置反馈资源，反馈波束配对状态、数据传输状态和信道质量，从而在数据传输失败或信道质量过差时，触发及时重新确定波束信息，减小信息传递的时延，增加数据传输可靠性。
可选的，所述第一节点是所述第一节点和所述第二节点间的发送节点，所述收发单元 1510，还用于向所述第三节点发送所述第一节点在所述第一链路的天线增益信息，所述天线增益信息用于所述第三节点确定所述第一节点的发送功率。
可选的，所述第一节点是所述第一节点和所述第二节点间的发送节点，所述收发单元1510，还用于接收来自所述第三节点的第一节点的发送功率。
第三节点确定第一节点和第二节点进行通信时第一节点的发送功率，保证合适的发送功率，避免功率较大时影响其他链路，功率较小时信道质量不高需要增加发送功率。
图16示出了本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意性框图。
图16所示的装置1600可对应于前文描述的装置，具体地，装置1600可以是图1中的任意一个节点具体的例子。装置1600包括：处理器1620。在本申请的实施例中，处理器1620用于实现相应的控制管理操作，例如，处理器1620用于支持装置执行前述实施例中如图2至图5、图7至图8、图10至图12所示的方法或操作或功能。可选的，装置1600还可以包括：存储器1610和通信接口1630；处理器1620、通信接口1630以及存储器1610可以相互连接或者通过总线1640相互连接。其中，通信接口1630用于支持该装置进行通信，存储器1610用于存储装置的程序代码和数据。处理器1620调用存储器1610中存储的代码或者数据实现相应的操作。该存储器1610可以跟处理器耦合在一起，也可以不耦合在一起。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式，用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。
其中，处理器1620可以是中央处理器单元，通用处理器，数字信号处理器，专用集成电路，现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框，模块和电路。所述处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合，例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合，数字信号处理器和微处理器的组合等等。通信接口1630可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块或其它类型的通信接口。总线1640可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect，PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture，EISA)总线等。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图16中仅用一条粗线表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。
如图17，本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置1700。该通信装置1700包括逻辑电路1710以及输入/输出接口(input/output interface)1720。
其中，逻辑电路1710可以为通信装置1700中的处理电路。逻辑电路1710可以耦合连接存储单元，调用存储单元中的指令，使得通信装置1700可以实现本申请各实施例的方法和功能。输入/输出接口1720，可以为通信装置1700中的输入输出电路，将通信装置1700处理好的信息输出，或将待处理的数据或信令信息输入通信装置1700进行处理。
作为一种方案，该通信装置1700用于实现上文各个方法实施例中由协作节点执行的操作。
例如，逻辑电路1710用于实现上文方法实施例中由协作节点执行的处理相关的操作，如，图2、图4、图5、图7至图8、图10、图12所示实施例中的协作节点执行的处理相关的操作，输入/输出接口1720用于实现上文方法实施例中由终端设备执行的获取和/或发送和/或接收相关的操作，如，图3所示实施例中的终端设备执行的发送和/或接收相关的操作。逻辑电路1710执行的操作具体可以参见上文对处理单元1320的说明，输入/输出 接口1720执行的操作可以参见上文对收发单元1310的说明，这里不再赘述。
作为另一种方案，该通信装置1700用于实现上文各个方法实施例中由第一节点和/或第二节点执行的操作。
例如，逻辑电路1710用于实现上文方法实施例中由第一节点和/或第二节点执行的处理相关的操作，如，图2、图4、图5、图7至图8、图10、图11、图12所示实施例中的第一节点和/或第二节点执行的处理相关的操作，输入/输出接口1720用于实现上文方法实施例中由第一节点和/或第二节点执行的发送和/或接收相关的操作，如，图12所示实施例中的第一节点和/或第二节点执行的发送和/或接收相关的操作。逻辑电路1710执行的操作具体可以参见上文对处理单元1520的说明，输入/输出接口1720执行的操作可以参见上文对收发单元1410或1510的说明，这里不再赘述。
本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，存储有计算机可执行指令，当所述计算机可执行指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行图2、图4、图5、图7至图8、图10至图12中各个方法的相应流程。
本申请还提供了一种装置，包括至少一个处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储指令，以实现上述图2、图4、图5、图7至图8、图10至图12中各个方法的相应流程。可选地，该装置还包括存储器，该存储器与处理器可能是分离部署的，也可能是集中部署的。可选地，该装置还包括通信接口，处理器与通信接口耦合。
本申请还提供了一种装置，所述装置包括至少一个逻辑电路和输入/输出接口，所述逻辑电路用于与输入/输出接口耦合，通过所述输入/输出接口传输数据，以执行图2、图4、图5、图7至图8、图10至图12中各个方法的相应流程。
本申请还提供了一种所述计算机程序产品，包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码被运行时，使得计算机执行图2、图4、图5、图7至图8、图10至图12中各个方法的相应流程。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (40)

  1. 一种波束配置方法，其特征在于，应用于通信系统中，所述通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，协作节点是所述第一节点、所述第二节点和所述第三节点中的任一节点，所述方法包括：
    所述协作节点获取第一信息，所述第一信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的信息和所述第二节点的候选波束的信息；
    所述协作节点根据所述第一信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所述第二节点的波束信息，其中，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束，所述第二节点的波束信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述协作节点获取第一信息，包括：
    所述协作节点通过以下至少一种方式获取所述第一信息：
    所述协作节点接收所述第一节点上报的所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，
    所述协作节点接收所述第二节点上报的所述第二节点的候选波束的信息。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述协作节点获取第一信息之前，还包括：
    所述协作节点执行以下至少一项操作：
    所述协作节点向所述第一节点发送第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，
    所述协作节点向所述第二节点发送第二请求信息，所述第二请求信息用于指示所述第二节点上报所述第二节点的候选波束的信息。
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中至少一项相关的信息。
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的索引、所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项；
    所述第二节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第二节点的候选波束的索引、所述第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第二节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的发送波束序列；
    所述第二节点的波束信息包括所述第二节点的接收波束序列。
  7. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述协作节点根据所述第一信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所述第二节点的波束信息，包括：
    所述协作节点根据所述第一节点的候选波束的索引和所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项，确定所述第一节点的发送波束的索引和所述第一节点的发送波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；
    所述协作节点根据所述第二节点的候选波束的索引和所述第二节点的候选波束的索 引对应角度中的至少一项，确定所述第二节点的接收波束的索引和所述第二节点的接收波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项。
  8. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息还包括第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项，所述第一子信息包括所述第一链路的方向、所述第一链路的距离、所述第二链路的方向以及所述第二链路的距离，所述第二子信息包括所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息；
    其中，所述第一链路是所述第一节点和所述第三节点之间的链路，所述第二链路是所述第二节点和所述第三节点之间的链路；
    其中，所述协作节点根据所述第一信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所述第二节点的波束信息，包括：
    所述协作节点根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息；
    所述协作节点根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第二节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第二节点的波束信息。
  9. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述协作节点执行以下至少一项操作：
    向所述第一节点发送所述第一节点的发送资源信息；或者，
    向所述第二节点发送所述第二节点的接收资源信息；
    其中，所述第一节点的发送资源信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束的资源，所述第二节点的接收资源信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束的资源。
  10. 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述协作节点是所述第二节点或所述第三节点，所述协作节点向所述第一节点发送所述第一节点的发送功率信息，所述第一节点的发送功率信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送功率。
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述协作节点是所述第一节点或所述第三节点，所述协作节点向所述第二节点发送第二节点的反馈资源信息，所述第二节点的反馈资源信息用于指示所述第二节点的反馈资源，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述协作节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
  12. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述协作节点为所述第三节点，所述协作节点获取第一信息，包括：
    所述协作节点直接从所述第一节点获取所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；
    所述协作节点直接从所述第二节点获取所述第二节点的候选波束的信息；
    或者，
    所述协作节点为所述第一节点或所述第二节点中的一者，所述协作节点获取第一信息，包括：
    所述协作节点通过所述第三节点间接获取所述第一节点或所述第二节点中的另一者的候选波束的信息。
  13. 根据权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述协作节点执行以下至少一项操作：
    所述协作节点向所述第一节点发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括所述第一节点的波束信息；或者，
    所述协作节点向所述第二节点发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二节点的波束信息。
  14. 一种波束配置方法，其特征在于，应用于通信系统中，所述通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，协作节点为所述第三节点或所述第二节点，所述方法包括：
    所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；
    所述第一节点接收来自所述协作节点的第一节点的波束信息，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束或接收波束。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息之前，还包括：
    所述第一节点接收所述协作节点发送的第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报所述第一节点的候选波束的信息。
  16. 根据权利要求14或15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中的至少一项相关的信息。
  17. 根据权利要求14至16中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的索引、所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
  18. 根据权利要求14至17中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的波束的索引和所述第一节点的波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；或者，
    所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的波束序列。
  19. 根据权利要求14至18中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一节点的波束信息是根据第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第一节点的候选波束的信息确定的；
    其中，所述第一链路是所述第一节点和所述第三节点之间的链路，所述第二链路是所述第二节点和所述第三节点之间的链路；
    其中，所述第一子信息包括所述第一链路的方向、所述第一链路的距离、所述第二链路的方向以及所述第二链路的距离，所述第二子信息包括所述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息。
  20. 根据权利要求14至19中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述第一节点接收来自所述协作节点的第一节点的资源信息，所述第一节点的资源信息包括所述第一节点的发送波束或接收波束的资源以及所述第一节点的反馈资源中的至少一项，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述协作节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
  21. 根据权利要求14至20中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述第一节点是所述第一节点和所述第二节点之间的发送节点，所述第一节点接收来自所述协作节点的所述第一节点的发送功率信息，所述第一节点的发送功率信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送功率。
  22. 一种装置，其特征在于，应用于通信系统中，所述通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，所述装置为协作节点，所述协作节点是所述第一节点、所述第二节点和所述第三节点中的任一节点，所述装置包括：
    收发单元，用于获取第一信息，所述第一信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的信息和所述第二节点的候选波束的信息；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第一信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息和所述第二节点的波束信息，其中，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束，所述第二节点的波束信息用于指示所述第二节点的接收波束。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元具体用于通过以下至少一种方式获取所述第一信息：
    接收所述第一节点上报的所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，
    接收所述第二节点上报的所述第二节点的候选波束的信息。
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元，还用于执行以下至少一项操作：
    向所述第一节点发送第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；或者，
    向所述第二节点发送第二请求信息，所述第二请求信息用于指示所述第二节点上报所述第二节点的候选波束的信息。
  25. 根据权利要求22至24中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中至少一项相关的信息。
  26. 根据权利要求22至25中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的索引、所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项；
    所述第二节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第二节点的候选波束的索引、所述第二节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第二节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
  27. 根据权利要求22至26中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的发送波束的索引和所述第一节点的发送波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；
    所述第二节点的波束信息包括所述第二节点的接收波束的索引和所述第二节点的接收波束的索引对应角度中的至少一项；
    或者，
    所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的发送波束序列；
    所述第二节点的波束信息包括所述第二节点的接收波束序列。
  28. 根据权利要求22至27中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一信息还包括第一子信息和第二子信息中的至少一项，所述第一子信息包括所述第一链路的方向、所述第一链路的距离、所述第二链路的方向以及所述第二链路的距离，所述第二子信息包括所 述第一节点的位置信息和所述第二节点的位置信息；
    其中，所述第一链路是所述第一节点和所述第三节点之间的链路，所述第二链路是所述第二节点和所述第三节点之间的链路；
    所述处理单元具体用于：
    根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第一节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第一节点的波束信息；
    根据所述第一子信息和所述第二子信息中的至少一项以及所述第二节点的候选波束的信息，确定所述第二节点的波束信息。
  29. 根据权利要求22至28中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述协作节点是所述第二节点或所述第三节点，所述收发单元还用于，
    向所述第一节点发送所述第一节点的发送功率信息，所述第一节点的发送功率信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送功率。
  30. 根据权利要求22至29中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述协作节点是所述第一节点或所述第三节点，所述收发单元，还用于向所述第二节点发送第二节点的反馈资源信息，所述第二节点的反馈资源信息用于指示所述第二节点的反馈资源，其中所述反馈资源用于向所述协作节点反馈所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的波束配对状态、所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的数据传输状态和所述第一节点与所述第二节点间的信道质量中的至少一项。
  31. 根据权利要求22至30中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于执行以下至少一项操作：
    向所述第一节点发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括所述第一节点的波束信息；或者，
    向所述第二节点发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二节点的波束信息。
  32. 一种装置，其特征在于，应用于通信系统中，所述通信系统包括第一节点、第二节点和第三节点，协作节点为所述第三节点或所述第二节点，所述装置为所述第一节点，所述装置包括收发单元，所述收发单元用于：
    向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；
    接收来自所述协作节点的第一节点的波束信息，所述第一节点的波束信息用于指示所述第一节点的发送波束或接收波束。
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元，还用于：
    接收所述协作节点发送的第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息用于指示所述第一节点上报所述第一节点的候选波束的信息。
  34. 根据权利要求32或33所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括与角度范围和地理范围中的至少一项相关的信息。
  35. 根据权利要求32至34中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一节点的候选波束的信息包括所述第一节点的候选波束的索引、所述第一节点的候选波束的索引对应角度和所述第一节点的候选波束的个数中的至少一项。
  36. 根据权利要求32至35中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的波束的索引和所述第一节点的波束的 索引对应角度中的至少一项；或者，
    所述第一节点的波束信息包括所述第一节点的波束序列。
  37. 根据权利要求32至36中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述协作节点为所述第三节点，所述收发单元，具体用于：
    向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息；
    或者，
    所述协作节点为所述第二节点，所述收发单元，具体用于：
    通过所述第三节点向所述协作节点发送所述第一节点的候选波束的信息。
  38. 一种装置，其特征在于，包括至少一个处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储指令，所述指令被所述处理器运行时，
    使得所述处理器执行如权利要求1至13中任意一项所述的方法，或者
    使得所述处理器执行如权利要求14至21中任意一项所述的方法。
  39. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，存储有计算机可执行指令，当所述计算机可执行指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法，或使得所述计算机执行如权利要求14至21中任一项所述的方法。
  40. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码被运行时，实现如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法，或实现如权利要求14至21中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2022/133144 2021-12-02 2022-11-21 波束配置方法、装置和系统 Ceased WO2023098499A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP22900304.1A EP4422086A4 (en) 2021-12-02 2022-11-21 Beam configuration method, apparatus and system
US18/668,170 US20240305351A1 (en) 2021-12-02 2024-05-18 Beam configuration method, apparatus, and system

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202111467660.7 2021-12-02
CN202111467660.7A CN116232396A (zh) 2021-12-02 2021-12-02 波束配置方法、装置和系统

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/668,170 Continuation US20240305351A1 (en) 2021-12-02 2024-05-18 Beam configuration method, apparatus, and system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023098499A1 true WO2023098499A1 (zh) 2023-06-08

Family

ID=86589665

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/133144 Ceased WO2023098499A1 (zh) 2021-12-02 2022-11-21 波束配置方法、装置和系统

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20240305351A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4422086A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN116232396A (zh)
WO (1) WO2023098499A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20250062819A1 (en) * 2023-08-15 2025-02-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Fast beam selection via user equipment receive beam selection reporting

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108696889A (zh) * 2017-03-30 2018-10-23 财团法人工业技术研究院 波束测量和反馈的方法及使用所述方法的基站与用户设备
WO2019118676A1 (en) * 2017-12-15 2019-06-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatuses for dynamic beam pair determination

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020141998A1 (en) * 2019-01-04 2020-07-09 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Flexible uplink beam management
US11637610B2 (en) * 2019-12-13 2023-04-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for spatial relation indication based on beam orientation

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108696889A (zh) * 2017-03-30 2018-10-23 财团法人工业技术研究院 波束测量和反馈的方法及使用所述方法的基站与用户设备
WO2019118676A1 (en) * 2017-12-15 2019-06-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatuses for dynamic beam pair determination

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NOKIA, ALCATEL-LUCENT SHANGHAI BELL: "SRS transmission for beam management", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1708912, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Hangzhou; 20170515 - 20170519, 6 May 2017 (2017-05-06), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051262762 *
See also references of EP4422086A4

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4422086A4 (en) 2025-03-19
CN116232396A (zh) 2023-06-06
EP4422086A1 (en) 2024-08-28
US20240305351A1 (en) 2024-09-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN110492913B (zh) 一种信号传输方法和装置
US12418336B2 (en) Beam pair training method and communication apparatus
WO2018028307A1 (zh) 一种基于多点协作的波束配置和管理方法
CN108696889A (zh) 波束测量和反馈的方法及使用所述方法的基站与用户设备
US10420109B2 (en) System and method for providing explicit feedback in communications systems with multi-point connectivity
KR102200645B1 (ko) 리소스 구성 방법 및 장치
EP4229770A1 (en) Iterative transmit refinement
WO2021208742A1 (zh) 一种波束对准方法及装置
WO2022253127A1 (zh) 用于无线通信的电子设备和方法、计算机可读存储介质
WO2023143153A1 (zh) 管理波束的方法和装置
CN116547866A (zh) 用于无线通信的方法和装置
CN114128165B (zh) 用于传输同步信号的方法和装置
WO2023246329A1 (zh) 测量上报方法、装置及通信设备
WO2024031370A1 (zh) 一种发送接收终端能力信息的方法、装置及系统
WO2021013138A1 (zh) 无线网络通信方法和通信装置
WO2023098499A1 (zh) 波束配置方法、装置和系统
WO2018028626A9 (zh) 测量的方法和装置
WO2017107644A1 (zh) 无线通信方法和装置
WO2021204253A1 (zh) 一种波束训练方法及装置
CN119547342A (zh) 大规模多输入多输出（mimo）网络中的频谱共享
WO2021208990A1 (zh) 协作波束赋形方法、通信装置及通信系统
WO2021169831A1 (zh) 一种波束赋形方法以及相关装置
US20240430776A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2025232897A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
WO2024193520A9 (zh) 通信方法及装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22900304

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2022900304

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022900304

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20240521

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE